Toyota 2003 4Runner Owners Manual

: Toyota Toyota-2003-4Runner-Owners-Manual-762995 toyota-2003-4runner-owners-manual-762995 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 408

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

2

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Information before driving your Toyota
Off–road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break–in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three–way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium–tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited–slip differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242
243
243
245
245
246
247
248
249
249
253
253
254
254
256
256
256

241

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Off–road vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground
clearance and narrower tread in relation
to the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide
variety of off–road applications. Specific
design characteristics give it a higher
center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature
causes this type of vehicle to be more
likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems. It is not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as ordinary passenger cars any
more than low–slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under
off–road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause
rollover.

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:


 In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.


 Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible. Failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing death or serious
injury.


 Loading cargo on the roof luggage
carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

242

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and
higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have better control.


 When driving off–road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.


 Do not drive horizontally across
steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off–road vehicle) can tip over sideways much
more easily than forward or backward.

Break–in period

Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break–in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:

Your new vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.


 Avoid full throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.


 Avoid racing the engine.

 Try to avoid hard stops during the first
300 km (200 miles).


 Do not drive for a long time at any
single speed, either fast or slow.


 Do not tow a trailer during the first 800
km (500 miles).

To help prevent gas station mix–ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5–M93
in Canada.

NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three–
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.

243

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

OCTANE RATING
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher. For
improved vehicle performance, the use
of premium unleaded gasoline with an
Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher is recommended.
Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating or research octane number lower
than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will
lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
GASOLINE
ADDITIVES

CONTAINING

DETERGENT

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build–up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.
QUALITY GASOLINE
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of three categories
that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 3 has been
adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in
vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance.
CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
GASOLINE QUALITY
In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

244

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE
 Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
 If driveability problems occur (poor
hot starting, vaporizing, engine
knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
 Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
87 L (23.0 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)

Fuel pump shut off system

Operation in foreign countries

The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start
it.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...
First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).

CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the engine. If you
find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system has
been damaged and it is in need of
repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.

245

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Three–way catalytic converters
The three–way catalytic converter is an
emission control device installed in the
exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.

CAUTION


 Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
1GR–FE engine


 Do not idle or park your vehicle
over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.

NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three–way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
 Use only unleaded gasoline.
 Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three–
way catalytic converter.
 Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
 Avoid racing the engine.
 Do not push–start or pull–start your
vehicle.
 Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.

2UZ–FE engine

246

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Engine exhaust cautions
 Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel systems could cause an extremely high three–way catalytic
converter temperature.


 Keep the back door and back win-

CAUTION


 Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.
It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.

 If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check–up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three–way catalytic converter system best.


 Make sure the exhaust system has

 To ensure that the three–way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.


 Do not run the engine in a garage

no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.

dow closed while driving. An open
or unsealed back door and back
window, may cause exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle.


 To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.


 If you smell exhaust fumes in the
vehicle, drive with the windows
open and the back door and back
window closed. Have the cause immediately located and corrected.

or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.


 Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

247

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Facts about engine oil
consumption
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.


 Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.


 Oil is also used to lubricate the stems
of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high–speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600
miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.
IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.

248

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Iridium–tipped spark plugs
(2UZ–FE engine)

Brake system

For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 324 in Section 7–2.

This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If either circuit should fail,
the other will still work. However, the pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.

Your engine is fitted with iridium–tipped
spark plugs.

NOTICE
Use only iridium–tipped spark plugs
and do not adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth driveability.

BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump to power–assist the
brakes. If the brake booster fails during
driving, the brake system warning light
comes on and buzzer sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work
properly. If they do not work well, depress
the brake pedal firmly. If the brake system
warning light comes on, immediately stop
your vehicle and contact your Toyota dealer.
It is not a malfunction that the brake system warning light may stay on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position.

249

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the brake system warning
light and buzzer. It is normal if the light
turns off and the buzzer stops sounding
after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine
compartment after the engine is started or
the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly.
This is a pump pulsating sound of the
brake system, and it is not a malfunction.

CAUTION


 Do not pump the brake pedal if the
engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your brake fluid
pressure reserve.


 Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.

ANTI–LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(with “ABS” warning light)
The anti–lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock–up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti–lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti–lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti–lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti–lock brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle begins to move. This means
that the anti–lock brake system is in the
self–check mode, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
When the anti–lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:


 You may hear the anti–lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.


 At the end of the anti–lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.

250

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti–lock
brake system: Although the anti–lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti–
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti–lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.


 Driving with tire chains installed.

 Driving over the steps such as the
joints on the road.


 Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti–lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

Type A

Anti–lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti–lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:


 Driving on rough, gravel or snow–
covered roads.

Type B

251

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

“ABS” warning light
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either
of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.


 Anti–lock brake system

 Traction control system
(two–wheel drive models)


 Active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 Vehicle stability control system

 Downhill assist control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 Hill–start assist control system
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti–lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels will lock up during a
sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

“VSC TRAC” warning light may come on
with the “ABS” warning light (brake assist
system warning light) when there is a malfunction somewhere in the anti–lock brake
system (brake assist system).
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.


 The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.


 The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti–lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
Either of the following conditions may
occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:


 The light may stay on for about 60
seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.


 Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
turns off after a few seconds.
DRUM–IN–DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
SYSTEM
Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc type
parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs bedding–down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

252

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Brake pad wear limit
indicators

Luggage stowage precautions

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding–down.

When stowing luggage or cargo in the
vehicle, observe the following:

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM


 Put luggage or cargo in the luggage
compartment when at all possible. Be
sure all items are secured in place.

When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Section 1–5.


 Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain balance.


 For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded weight.

CAUTION
The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.


 To prevent luggage or packages
from sliding forward during braking,
do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the
seatbacks. Keep luggage or packages low, as close to the floor as
possible.


 Do not exceed 66 kg (145 lb.) of
cargo load in the luggage compartment.


 Do not place anything on the flattened seat or it may slide forward
during braking.

253

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Limited–slip differential
(four–wheel drive models)

 Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should
ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise,
they are much more likely to suffer
serious bodily injury, in the event
of sudden braking or a collision.


 Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden
braking or an accident. Secure all
items in a safe place.


 Do not drive with objects left on
top of the instrument panel. They
may interfere with the driver’s field
of view. Or they may move during
sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control
of the vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.

NOTICE

Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification number

Your Toyota is equipped with a limited–slip
center differential (transfer). If one wheel
begins to spin, the limited–slip center differential (transfer) is designed to aid traction by automatically transmitting driving
force to the wheels on the other drive
axle. It transmits driving force to the front
wheels if a rear wheel spins, and to the
rear wheels if a front wheel spins.

CAUTION
Do not start or run the engine while
your vehicle is supported by a jack.
The vehicle could be driven off the
jack and could pose a danger or result in serious injury.

NOTICE
Use only a spare tire of the same
brand, size, construction and load capacity as the original tires on your
Toyota because damage to the limited–slip differential could possibly occur with another tire type.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.

Do not load the vehicle beyond the
cargo load specified on page 352 in
Section 8.

254

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.

1GR–FE engine

2UZ–FE engine

255

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Theft prevention labels
(except for Canada)
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 56
mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

Suspension and chassis

Types of tires

CAUTION

Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally equipped with.

Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

Summer tires are high–speed capability
tires best suited to highway driving under
dry conditions.

1. Summer tires

Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on
snow–covered or icy roads. For driving on
snow–covered or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If installing snow
tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
better traction in snow and to be adequate
for driving in most winter conditions, as
well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have
adequate traction performance compared
with snow tires in heavy or loose snow.
Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and
handling
performance
compared with summer tires in highway
driving.

256

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION


 Do not mix summer and all season
tires on your vehicle as this can
cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.


 Do not use tire other than the
manufacturer’s designated tires, and
never mix tires or wheels of the
sizes different from the originals.

257

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

258

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

3

STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off–road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260
260
261
263
264
265
266
275

259

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Before starting the engine
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion angle, head restraint
height and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.

How to start the engine—
—Cranking hold function

(a) Before cranking

Once you turn the ignition key to “START”
position and release it, the cranking hold
function continues to crank the engine in
“ON” position until it starts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

The function stops cranking the engine
after about 25 seconds maximum if the
engine has not started yet. When you
crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
need to restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A starter safety device will
prevent the starter from operating if the
selector lever is in any drive position.

If you hold the key in “START” position,
the function will keep cranking for about
30 seconds maximum.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.

260

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Tips for driving in various
conditions

 Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.

(b) Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “(a) Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air–fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to “START”
position, then release it.
2. After the engine runs for about 10 seconds, you are ready to drive.
If the weather is below freezing, let the
engine warm up for a few minutes before
driving.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page
278 in Section 4.

NOTICE

This will allow you much better control.


 Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

 Do not race a cold engine.
 If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp–edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.


 When parking on a hill, turn the front
wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block the
wheels.


 Washing your vehicle or driving through
deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

261

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Vehicles with rear height control air
suspension: When you drive on a
bumpy road, it is recommended that
the vehicle height should be set in the
“N” (normal) or “H” (high) mode.

CAUTION


 Before driving off, make sure that
the parking brake is fully released
and the parking brake reminder
light is off.


 Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.


 Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.


 To drive down a long or steep hill,
reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.


 Do not drive in excess of the speed


 Vehicles with rear height control air

limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high–speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high–speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.

suspension: If you drive through
deep water over about 500 mm (20
in.) in depth, put the vehicle height
in the “H” (high) mode with the
height select switch and then turn
off the rear height control air suspension by pushing the “HEIGHT
CONTROL OFF” switch. Drive your
vehicle at 30 km/h (19 mph) or lower speed.


 Do not continue normal driving
when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.


 Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause
the vehicle to spin or skid.

262

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Off–road driving precautions
When driving your vehicle off–road, please
observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to off–road
vehicles.
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
off–road vehicles are permitted to travel.
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
permission before entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should
be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off–road, consult
the following organizations.


 State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments


 Recreational Vehicle Clubs

 U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
Land Management

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:


 Drive carefully when off the road.
Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous places.


 Do not grip the steering wheel
spokes when driving off–road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel and
injure your hands. Keep both hands
and especially your thumbs on the
outside of the rim.


 Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.


 After driving through tall grass,
mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering
to the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.


 In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.


 When driving off–road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.


 State Motor Vehicle Bureau

263

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Winter driving tips
NOTICE
 If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the river bed for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.
 Take all necessary safety measures
to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does
not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
Water can wash the grease from
wheel bearings, causing rusting and
premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission
and transfer case, reducing the gear
oil’s lubricating qualities.
 Sand and mud that has accumulated
in brake drums and around brake
discs may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system components.

 Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off–road
driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.
Your coolant must contain ethylene–glycol
type coolant for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. Use “Toyota
Genuine Long Life Coolant” or equivalent.
See page 326 in Section 7–2 for details
about coolant type selection.

NOTICE
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or
plain water alone.
When it is extremely cold, we recommend
to use 60% solution for your Toyota, to
provide protection down to about –50C
(–58F). Do not use more than 70% solution for better coolant performance.
Check the condition of the battery and
cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape
to provide enough power for winter starting. Section 7–3 tells you how to visually
inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
to check the level of charge.

264

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Dinghy towing
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.

Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.

See page 324 in Section 7–2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter
months may cause harder starting. If you
are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Toyota dealer—he will be pleased to
help.

When parking, put the transmission into
“P” and block the front wheels. Do not
use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking
brake mechanism may freeze, making it
hard to release.

Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.

265

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger–and–load–carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your
local Toyota dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION

WEIGHT LIMITS
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross combination weight,
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight
and trailer tongue load are all within
the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.

For weight carrying hitch

Vehicles with rear height control air
suspension: When disconnecting a
trailer, put the vehicle height in the
“LO” (low) mode and push the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to
turn off the rear height control air
suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may be changed in the automatic leveling function, resulting in
accident. For details see “Rear height
control air suspension” on page 158
in Section 1–6.

Also for weight distributing hitch

266

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION


 The maximum gross trailer weight
(trailer weight plus cargo weight)
must never exceed the following for
vehicle with equipped. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.


 According to the hitch receiver
type, the maximum gross trailer
weight and hitch that can be used
differs. Refer to the above illustrations to confirm the hitch receiver
type for your vehicle.
For weight carrying hitch
2268 kg (5000 lb.)
Also for weight distributing hitch
1GR–FE engine
Two–wheel drive models
3039 kg (6700 lb.)
Four–wheel drive models
2903 kg (6400 lb.)
2UZ–FE engine
Two–wheel drive models
3311 kg (7300 lb.)
Four–wheel drive models
3175 kg (7000 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 2268 kg (5000 lb.), Toyota
recommends to use a weight distributing hitch.
If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is
necessary to use a sway control
device with sufficient capacity. The
combination of the gross trailer
weight added to the total weight of
the vehicle, occupants and vehicle
cargo must never exceed a total of
the following.
For weight carrying hitch
1GR–FE engine
4354 kg (9600 lb.)
2UZ–FE engine
4422 kg (9750 lb.)
Also for weight distributing hitch
1GR–FE engine
5034 kg (11100 lb.)
2UZ–FE engine
5443 kg (12000 lb.)
Exceeding the maximum weight of
the trailer, the vehicle, or the vehicle and trailer combination, can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.


 Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer–hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

267

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum of weights of
the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.

Total trailer weight


 The load on either the front or rear

Total trailer weight

axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) listed on the Certification
Label.

Tongue load

For weight carrying hitch
227 kg (500 lb.)
Also for weight distributing hitch
1GR–FE engine
Two–wheel drive models
303 kg (670 lb.)
Four–wheel drive models
290 kg (640 lb.)
2UZ–FE engine
Two–wheel drive models
331 kg (730 lb.)
Four–wheel drive models
317 kg (700 lb.)

Tongue load


 100 = 10%


 The trailer cargo load should be
distributed so that the tongue load
is 10% of the total trailer weight,
not exceeding the maximum load of
the following.

Never load the trailer with more
weight in the back than in the
front. About 60% of the trailer load
should be in the front half of the
trailer and the remaining 40% in the
rear.

268

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

HITCHES


 If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you
should consult with your Toyota dealer.


 Use only a hitch recommended by the
hitch manufacturer and the one which
conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.


 According to the hitch receiver type,
the maximum gross trailer weight and
hitch that can be used differs. Refer to
the above illustrations to confirm the
hitch receiver type for your vehicle.


 If you wish to install an aftermarket
hitch, the hitch must be bolted securely
to the vehicle frame and installed according to the hitch manufactures’ instructions.

NOTICE
 Do not install weight distributing
hitch to weight carrying hitch receiver because it will be damaged
your vehicle.
 Do not use axle–mounted hitches as
they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or
tires. Also, never install a hitch
which may interfere with the normal
function of an Energy Absorbing
Bumper, if so equipped.
1
2
3
4

Trailer ball load rating
Ball diameter
Shank length
Shank diameter


 The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease.


 Toyota recommends the ball mount assembly be removed when not towing to
prevent injury and to prevent damage
in the event of a rear end collision.
After removing the ball mount assembly, install the grommet to the hitch to
prevent entry of dirt and mud.

269

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TRAILER BALL

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO
TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT

Follow these easy steps to properly determine the correct trailer ball for your application:

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer
ball setup on must be the proper height
for the coupler on the trailer.

1. Determine the correct trailer ball size
for the trailer coupler. Most couplers
are stamped with the required trailer
ball size. The sizes you will most likely
find stamped on the coupler are:
Trailer class

Typical trailer ball size

III and IV

2 5/16 in.

II

2 in.

I

1 7/8 in.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS


 Toyota

recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.


 A safety chain must always be used
between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to
match or exceed the gross trailer
weight rating of the trailer. The trailer
ball load rating should be printed on
the top of the ball.
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the
threaded ball shank must protrude beyond the bottom of the lock washer
and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer
ball shank must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter size.

NOTICE
Only use a ball mount attachment
specified for the Toyota 4runner.

1 Coupler
2 Trailer ball
3 Ball mount attachment

270

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TIRES

CAUTION


 Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
properly inflated. See page 332 in Section 7–2 and page 356 in Section 8 for
instructions.


 If the total trailer weight exceeds
453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
required.


 The trailer tires should be inflated to


 Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-

the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total
trailer weight.

draulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.


 Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.

SERVICE CONNECTOR
BRAKE CONTROLLER

FOR

TOWING

Your vehicle is equipped with a service
connector for the towing brake controller
as shown. Link the connector to the towing brake controller via the sub wire harness stored in the glove box. The detailed
explanation of the sub wire harness circuit
is packed together with the sub wire harness.
Be sure to position the towing brake controller where it does not prevent the driver
from operating the pedal.
Toyota recommends that the sub wire harness be stored in the glove box when it
is not in use.

271

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Your vehicle is equipped with a wire

TOWING
LIGHTS

CONNECTOR

FOR

TRAILER

harness stored in the rear end under
body. Some models are fitted with a
socket for trailer lights under the rear
bumper. Use either of them to connect
and operate the trailer lights. However,
the trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the
correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation
of the turn signals and stop lights each
time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.
The towing connector can be also connected to the trailer brake and trailer
sub battery.
BREAK–IN SCHEDULE


 Toyota recommends that you do not
tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE


 If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will
require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled
maintenance information in the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.


 Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
CONNECTING A TRAILER (models with
rear height control air suspension)
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and
perform the following:
1. Put the rear height control air suspension in the “LO” (low) mode. Turn the
ignition switch off or push the “HEIGHT
CONTROL OFF” switch to turn off the
rear height control air suspension.
2. Connect a trailer.
3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to
turn on the rear height control air suspension. Select the “N” (normal) mode
with the height select switch.

272

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

DISCONNECTING A TRAILER (models
with rear height control air suspension)
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and
perform the following:
1. Put the rear height control air suspension in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make
sure the vehicle height is in the “LO”
(low) mode by pushing the height select switch on the “” side.)
2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to
turn off the rear height control air suspension.
3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on
the ground and raise the hitch by 100
mm (4 in.).
4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to
turn on the rear height control air suspension.
5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the
rear vehicle height is lowered by the
automatic leveling function.
6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If
not, raise the hitch higher and repeat
steps 2 through 5.

7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO”
(low) mode where the hitch does not
touch anything in the “N” (normal)
mode.
8. Put the rear height control air suspension in the “N” (normal) mode.
PRE–TOWING SAFETY CHECK


 Check that your vehicle remains level
when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose–up or nose–down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.


 Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it cannot shift.


 Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any applicable federal, state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle–
trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:


 Before starting out, check operation of
the lights and all vehicle–trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.


 Backing with a trailer is difficult and
requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer.) Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an accident.

273

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Because stopping distance may be in-


 Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-


 Because of the added load of the trail-

creased, vehicle–to–vehicle distance
should be increased when towing a
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and
trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.

versely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30C [85F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” on page 282 in
Section 4.


 Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.


 Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.


 Remember that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.


 Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.


 In order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not put the transmission in
“D”.


 Always place wheel blocks under both
the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it
cannot be avoided, do so only after
performing the following:
1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

274

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer
When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position,
start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION


 Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or
the posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle–
trailer
combination
usually
increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.


 Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.


 Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:


 Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
332 in Section 7–2 for instructions.


 Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.


 Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
driving—but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.


 Put the selector lever into the “D”
when engine braking is not required.
5–speed automatic transmission—Driving with the selector lever in “4” will
reduce the fuel economy. (For details,
see “Automatic transmission (5–speed)”
on page 129 in Section 1–6.)
4–speed automatic transmission—Driving with the selector lever in “3” will
reduce the fuel economy. (For details,
see “Automatic transmission (4–speed)”
on page 134 in Section 1–6.)

275

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Accelerate

slowly and smoothly.
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high
gear as quickly as possible.


 Avoid long engine idling. If you have
a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.


 Avoid engine lugging or over–revving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.


 Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes fuel.

Stop–and–go

driving


 Avoid

unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.


 Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.


 Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal. This causes premature wear,
overheating and poor fuel economy.


 Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.


 Keep the front wheels in proper
alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is running.


 Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion.


 Keep your vehicle tuned–up and in
top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

276

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

4

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase the engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

278
281
281
282
283
292
293
298
298
299

277

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting procedure given in “How to start the engine”
on page 260 in Section 3 and that you
have sufficient fuel. Also, check whether
the other keys will start the engine. If
they work, your key may be broken. Have
the key checked at your Toyota dealer. If
none of your keys work, there may be a
malfunction in the immobiliser system. Call
your Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page
10 in Section 1–2.)
If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c) Jump starting” on page
279 for further instructions.

(b) Starting a flooded engine
NOTICE
Do not pull– or push–start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or
cause a collision when the engine
starts. Also the three–way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start—
1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or
“LOCK” and try starting the engine
again.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” on page 278 for further instructions.

If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.
If this happens, turn the ignition key to
“START” with the accelerator pedal fully
depressed, and hold the key at this position for about 30 seconds. Then the
cranking hold function stops cranking automatically, and you can try starting the
engine with your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait a few
minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.

278

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.


 The gas normally produced by a

If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.


 Warning: Battery posts, terminals

CAUTION

battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer
and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.


 Batteries

contain
sulfuric
acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.


 If you should accidentally get acid

NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while en route to the medical office.

279

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Jumper cable

Discharged battery

Booster
battery
Positive
terminal
(“+” mark)
Jumper cable Positive terminal
(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.
a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.
b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.

Discharged battery

Negative
terminal
(“–” mark)

Booster battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative (–)
terminal on the booster battery.

Connecting point for 1GR–FE engine

d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
The recommended connecting points
are shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 2UZ–FE engine

280

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Do not connect the cable to or near
any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.

CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.

If your engine stalls while
driving

If you cannot increase the
engine speed

If your engine stalls while driving...

If the engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there may
be a problem somewhere in your electronic
throttle control system.

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or
“LOCK”, and try starting the engine
again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your
vehicle will not start” on page 278 in this
Section.

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

8. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
dealer.

281

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If your vehicle overheats
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used.

CAUTION

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running.

CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the
coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot. Serious injury could result from
scalding hot fluid and steam blown
out under pressure.
7. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
there are no obvious leaks, you may
help the engine cool down more quickly
by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
few minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.

282

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If you have a flat tire—
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place well away from
the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center
divider of a highway. Park on a level
spot with firm ground.


 Stop the vehicle on a level firm

2. Stop the engine and
emergency flashers.


 Make sure to set the jack properly

turn on

your

3. Firmly set the parking brake and put
the transmission in “P”.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
on the side away from traffic.

ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transmission in “P”.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite
to the one being changed if necessary.
in the jack point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or
may allow the vehicle to fall off the
jack and cause personal injury.

5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.


 Never get under the vehicle when

CAUTION


 Use the jack only for lifting your

When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of
personal injury:


 Do not raise the vehicle with some-

NOTICE
 Do not continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a tire and wheel
beyond repair.
 Vehicles with rear height control air
suspension: When jacking up or
installing the tire chains, be sure to
turn off the rear height control and
stop the engine. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change in the automatic leveling function, resulting
in accident.

the vehicle is supported by the jack
alone.
vehicle during wheel changing.
one in the vehicle.


 Follow jacking instructions.

 Do not put any part of your body


 When raising the vehicle, do not

under the vehicle supported by the
jack. Otherwise, personal injury may
occur.


 Raise the vehicle only high enough

place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.
to remove and change the tire.


 Do not start or run the engine while
your vehicle is supported by the
jack.

283

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Required tools and spare
tire

1. Get the required tools and spare
tire.
1. Tool bag
2. Jack
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you
should familiarize yourself with the use of
the jack, each of the tools and their storage locations.

Turn the jack joint by hand.
To remove: Turn the joint in direction 1
until the jack is free.
To store: Turn the joint in direction 2 until
the jack is firmly secured to prevent it
flying forward during a collision or sudden
braking.

To remove the spare tire under the luggage compartment:
1. Put a jack handle and jack handle extensions together as shown in the illustration.
1. Jack handle extensions
2. Jack handle

When storing the tool bag, make sure it
is securely held by the tightening strap.

284

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE
Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise,
the extension may come off and it
may damage the paint or vehicle
body.

When connecting a jack handle extension
with jack handle end, use a Phillips–head
screwdriver or jack handle to tighten the
bolts on the joints as shown in the illustration.
When connecting the jack handle with extension, tighten the bolt on the joint securely.
When you tighten the bolt, make sure that
it fits into the depression on the joint.

2. Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn
it counterclockwise with the handle.
3. After the tire is lowered completely to
the ground, remove the holding bracket.
When storing the spare tire, put it in place
with the outer side of the wheel facing up.
Then secure the tire, taking care that the
tire goes straight up without catching on
any other part, to prevent it from flying
forward during a collision or sudden braking.

285

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Blocking the wheel

—Removing wheel ornament

—Loosening wheel nuts

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the flat tire to keep the vehicle from
rolling when it is jacked up.

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
beveled end of the wheel nut wrench as
shown.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.

When blocking the wheel, place a wheel
block in front of one of the front wheels
or behind one of the rear wheels.

CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the ornament by
hand. Take due care in handling the
ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to
loosen. To get maximum leverage, fit the
wrench to the nut so that the handle is
on the right side, as shown above. Grab
the wrench near the end of the handle
and pull up on the handle. Be careful that
the wrench does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew
them about one–half turn.

286

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Positioning the jack
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts
or nuts. The nuts may loose and the
wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident.

Front

Rear

5. Position the jack at the correct jack
point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a
level and solid place.
JACK POINTS:
Front—Under the frame side rail
Rear—Under the rear axle housing

Put a jack handle, jack handle extensions
and jack handle end together as shown in
the illustration.
1. Jack handle end
2. Jack handle extensions
3. Jack handle

287

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Raising your vehicle
NOTICE
Tighten all joints securely. Otherwise,
the extension may come off and it
may damage the paint or vehicle
body.

Front of vehicle

When connecting a jack handle extension
with jack handle end, use a Phillips–head
screwdriver or jack handle to tighten the
bolts on the joints as shown in the illustration.
When connecting the jack handle with extension, tighten the bolt on the joint securely.
When you tighten the bolt, make sure that
it fits into the depression on the joint.

6. After making sure that no one is in
the vehicle, as the jack touches the
vehicle and begins to fit, double–
check that it is properly positioned.
Rear side only—
When positioning the jack under the rear
axle housing, make sure the groove on
the top of the jack fits with the rear axle
housing.

288

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Changing wheels

7. Raise the vehicle high enough so
that the spare tire can be installed.

8. Remove the wheel nuts and change
tires.

Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare tire
than when removing the flat tire.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle
end into the jack (it is a loose fit) and
turn it clockwise with the handle.

CAUTION

Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the bolts.
Then lift up the wheel and get at least the
top bolt started through its hole. Wiggle
the tire and press it back over the other
bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove any corrosion on the mounting surfaces with a
wire brush or such. Installation of wheels
without good metal–to–metal contact at the
mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to
loosen and eventually cause a wheel to
come off while driving.

Never get under the vehicle when the
vehicle is supported by the jack
alone.

289

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

—Lowering your vehicle
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts
or nuts. Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts and damaging the
bolts. The nuts may loose and the
wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil
or grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.

9. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger
tight.

10. Lower the vehicle completely and
tighten the wheel nuts.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end inward) and tighten them as much as you
can by hand. Press back on the tire back
and see if you can tighten them more.

Turn the jack handle extension counterclockwise with handle to lower the vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and turn
it clockwise to tighten the nuts. Do not
use other tools or any additional leverage
other than your hands, such as a hammer,
pipe or your foot. Make sure the wrench
is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the
order shown. Repeat the process until all
the nuts are tight.

290

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Reinstalling wheel ornament

12. Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.

CAUTION

Adjust the air pressure to the specification
designated on page 356 in Section 8. If
the pressure is lower, drive slowly to the
nearest service station and fill to the correct pressure.


 When lowering the vehicle, make
sure all portions of your body and
all other persons around will not be
injured as the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation
valve cap as dirt and moisture could get
into the valve core and possibly cause air
leakage. If the cap is missing, have a new
one put on as soon as possible.


 Have the wheel nuts tightened with
torque wrench to 110 N·m (11.5
kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as soon as possible after changing wheels. Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the
wheels may fall off, which could
cause a serious accident.

—After changing wheels

13. Restow all the tools, jack and flat
tire securely.

11. Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Put the wheel ornament into position and
then tap it firmly with the side or heel of
your hand to snap it into place.

CAUTION

As soon after changing wheels as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the torque
specified on page 356 in Section 8 with
a torque wrench. Have a technician repair
the flat tire.

Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal
injury.

291

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If your vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools, jack and flat tire are securely
in place in their storage location to
reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden
braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward.
Turn off the traction control system to
become unstuck to allow the tires to
spin enough to remove the vehicle from
the obstruction. (For details, see “Traction control system” on page 145 in
Section 1–6.)

CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the
rocking operation the vehicle may
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or objects.

NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.
 Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
 Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
 If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.

292

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If your vehicle needs to be
towed—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have
your vehicle towed using either (a) or
(b).
Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in “—Emergency towing” on page 295 in this Section.
Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two–wheel drive models

Four–wheel drive models

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.

293

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Two–wheel drive models—

Four–wheel drive models—

Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—

FULL–TIME
MODELS

CAUTION
Vehicles with rear height control air
suspension: When your vehicle is
towed, put the vehicle height in the
“N” (normal) mode and push the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch to
turn off the rear height control air
suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may be changed in the automatic leveling function, resulting in
accident. For details, see “Rear
height control air suspension” on
page 158 in Section 1–6.

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

FOUR

WHEEL

DRIVE

Use a towing dolly under the wheels not
lifted by the truck.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission.
From rear—Place the ignition key in the
“ACC” position.

NOTICE
 When lifting wheels, take care to
ensure adequate ground clearance
for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the
bumper and/or underbody of the
towed vehicle will be damaged during towing.
 Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position, as the
steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight while towing.

MULTI–MODE
MODELS

FOUR

WHEEL

DRIVE

From front—
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission.
From rear—We recommend using a towing dolly under the front wheels. If you do
not use a towing dolly, place the ignition
key in the “ACC” position, put the transmission in “N” and the multi–mode control
switch knob in “H2”.

(b) Using flat bed truck

294

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Emergency towing
NOTICE
 When lifting wheels, take care to
ensure adequate ground clearance
for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the
bumper and/or underbody of the
towed vehicle will be damaged during towing.
 Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position when towing from the rear without a towing
dolly. The steering lock mechanism
is not strong enough to hold the
front wheels straight.

(c) Towing with sling
type truck

Front

All models—
(c) Towing with sling type truck

(b) Using flat bed truck

NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.

Rear

295

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to either emergency towing eyelet
under the front of the vehicle or the
left emergency towing eyelet under the
rear of the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicles.

NOTICE
Only use specified towing eyelet;
otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard–surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing vehicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would place
excessive stress on the emergency
towing eyelet and towing cable or
chain. The eyelet and towing cable or
chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing eyelet provided.
Before towing, release the parking brake
and put the transmission in “N”. The key
must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON”
(engine running).
Four–wheel drive models—On multi–mode
four–wheel drive models, put the multi–
mode control switch knob in “H2”. On full–
time four–wheel drive models, unlock the
center differential.

296

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Emergency towing eyelet
precautions

 Before emergency towing, check that
the eyelet is not broken or damaged
and that the installation bolts are not
loose.


 Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.


 Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady
and even force.


 To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.

—Tips for towing a stuck
vehicle
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is
used to get out when your vehicle
becomes struck in mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power, make sure to observe the precautions mentioned below. Otherwise,
excessive stress will be put on the
eyelet and the towing cable or chain
may break, causing serious injury or
damage.

The following methods are effective to
get out when your vehicle is struck in
mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power. Use extreme caution when towing vehicles. In addition,
keep away from the vehicles and towing
cable or chain when towing.


 Remove the soil and sand in the front
and the back of the tires.


 Place a stone or wood under the tires.


 If the towing vehicle can hardly
move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.


 Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.


 Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.

297

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever

If you lose your keys
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If
you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobiliser system must be replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on
page 10 in Section 1–2.

If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of “P” position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:

3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent
into the hole to push down the shift
lock override button. You can shift
out of “P” position only while pushing the button.

1. Turn the ignition key to
position. Make sure the
brake is set.

4. Shift into “N” position.

“LOCK”
parking

2. Pry up the cover with a flat–bladed
screwdriver or equivalent.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

5. Insert the cover.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

298

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If you lose your wireless
remote control transmitter
Please contact your nearest Toyota
dealer and you can purchase a new
wireless remote control transmitter.
Have the registered identification numbers
of your transmitters deleted from your vehicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
an accident. Then, have the identification
number of your new transmitter registered.
At the same time, you must bring all of
the remaining transmitters to have them
registered again as well.

299

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

300

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

5

CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion prevention and appearance care
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain clearing mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

302
303
305
307

301

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through the diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long–term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:


 The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard–to–reach areas under
the vehicle.


 Chipping

of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:


 Road salt or dust control chemicals will
accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea–
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.


 High humidity accelerates corrosion especially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.


 Wetness or dampness to certain parts


 High pressure water or steam is effec-

of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing. The
lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
as trapped water in these areas can
cause corrosion.


 High ambient temperatures can cause
corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.
The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.


 Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

your

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
page 303 in this Section for more tips.

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:

Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.

To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:


 If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

302

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full–size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp and it will cause corrosion. Even if
your garage is heated, a wet vehicle can
corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.

vehicle

clean

by

regular

The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.


 When driving in a coastal area

 When driving on a road sprinkled with
antifreeze


 When having coal tar, tree sap, bird
droppings and carcass of an insect


 When driving in the areas where there
is a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust
and chemical substances


 When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud
Hand–washing your Toyota
Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not hot to the touch.

CAUTION
When cleaning under floor or chassis,
be careful not to injure your hands.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or in the
wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high–
pressure car wash, for example) at or
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
door opened. If the water enters the air
vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.
Rear height control air suspension: Do not
spray a jet of high–pressure water at the
air suspension unit, especially the air
spring, at an extremely close range. This
may damage the air suspension.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splashes an ornament, be sure to
wash it off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.

303

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged
plastic wheel ornament. It may fly off
the wheel and cause accidents while
the vehicle is moving.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.

NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause
damage.
3. Rinse
thoroughly—dried
soap
can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the
paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the
washing process itself. Scratching reduces
paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car
wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on
your vehicle.
Waxing your Toyota
Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car–cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

NOTICE
Always remove the plastic bumpers if
your vehicle is re–painted and placed
in a high heat paint waxing booth.
High temperatures could damage the
bumpers.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
surface does not repel water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.

304

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Cleaning the interior
CAUTION


 Vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags:
Be careful not to splash water or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side airbags and curtain
shield airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.


 Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

Carpets

The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.

Use a good foam–type
clean the carpets.

First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt does not come off,
repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming–type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

shampoo

to

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.
Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.
Seat belts

NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.

The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.

305

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE

NOTICE

 Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts—it may weaken them.

 Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.

 Do not use the belts until they become dry.
Windows
The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.

NOTICE
 When cleaning the inside of the
rear window, be careful not to
scratch or damage the heater wires
or connectors.
 When cleaning the inside of the
rear quarter window, be careful not
to scratch or damage the printed
antenna.
Air conditioning control panel, car audio, instrument panel, console panel
and switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

 If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.
 If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not apill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the
ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.
Leather Interior
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE
 If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
 Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
 Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.
 Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
 Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.

306

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Rain clearing mirrors
 The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
 Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

On some models, the outside rear view
mirrors have been coated to produce a
“rain clearing” effect. This coating
causes the raindrops to spread, clearing the driver’s rear view when it rains.
It is sufficient to wash the mirrors with
water for day to day care.
The rain clearing effect is
drizzle and light rain.

reduced in

In the following cases, the rain clearing
effect will be reduced temporarily, but will
gradually recover.


 After wiping dirt off the mirrors

 When the mirrors fog up

 After waxing your vehicle in an automatic car wash


 After your vehicle has been parked for
a long period in underground parking
lots, etc. where there is no direct sunlight.
If you would like to restore the rain clearing effect to its normal level immediately
in the above cases, wash the mirrors with
neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.

NOTICE
To maintain the rain clearing ability,
and prevent the mirrors from being
scratched, observe the following precautions.
 Do not use any glass cleaners that
contain compounds.
 If ice should jam the mirror, do not
scrape the mirror. Use a spray de–
icer to free the mirror.
 Wash off any wax stuck to the mirrors with neutral detergent and
rinse thoroughly as any wax on the
surface of the mirrors can cause
the rain clearing effect to be lost.
 Do not use any water repellents as
they can destroy the rain clearing
effect. If any repellent gets stuck on
the surface of the mirrors, wash it
off with neutral detergent, then
rinse thoroughly.

307

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

308

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

6

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Vehicle maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . .

310
311
313
314

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

309

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day–to–day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, and trouble–free, safe, and economical drivings.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day–
to–day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

Where to go for service?

The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.

Toyota technicians are well–trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in–dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.

For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.

You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle—reliably and economically.

The owner may elect to use non–Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.

You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.

What about do–it–yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented on page 315 in
Section 7.

310

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

General maintenance
If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do–it–yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.

Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage
or excessive wear. See page 333 in Section 7–2 for additional information. When
checking the tires, make sure no nuts are
missing, and check the nuts for looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page
334 in Section 7–2 for additional information.
Fluid leaks

Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.

Tire pressure

Doors and engine hood

Check the pressure with a gauge every
two weeks, or at least once a month. See
page 332 in Section 7–2 for additional
information.

Check that all doors including back door
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

311

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Seat belts

Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Check that the seat belt system
buckles, retractors and anchors
properly and smoothly. Make sure
belt webbing is not cut, frayed,
damaged.

Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
such as
operate
that the
worn or

Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.

Check that it has the specified free play.
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.

Brakes

Seats

Parking brake

Check that all front seat controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in any position. Check that the
head restraint move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any
latched position. For folding–down rear
seatbacks and swing–up rear seat cushions, check that the latches lock securely.

Check that the pedal has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.

At a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.

Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See page 343 in Section 7–3 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the see–through
reservoir when the engine is cold. See
page 326 in Section 7–2 for additional
information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 328 in
Section 7–2 for additional information.

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
On a safe incline, check that your vehicle
is held securely with the selector lever in
“P” position and all brakes released.

312

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Battery condition
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page 340 in Section 7–3 for
additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 328 in Section 7–2 for additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See page 324 in Section
7–2 for additional information.
Power steering fluid level

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip–offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:










Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.


 Change in exhaust sound (This may
indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See page 329 in Section 7–2 for additional information.


 Flat–looking tire; excessive tire squeal

Exhaust system


 Strange noises related to suspension

If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on
page 247 in Section 2.)

If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.

when cornering; uneven tire wear


 Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road
movement


 Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
when braking


 Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

313

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On–Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even
does
pass
have

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
even the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re–testing.

if the malfunction indicator lamp
not come on, your vehicle may not
the I/M test as readiness codes
not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

314

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

8

SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Dimensions and cargo load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

352
352
353
353
356
356

351

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Dimensions and cargo load

Engine

Overall length

mm (in.)

4800 (189.0)

Overall width

mm (in.)

1875

(73.8)

mm (in.)

1820
1765
1760
1755
1750
1810
1750
1740

(71.7)∗2 or
(69.5)∗2, 5
(69.3)∗3, 5
(69.1)∗2
(68.9)∗3
(71.3)∗2 or
(68.9)∗2 or
(68.5)∗2 or

Overall height∗1

Wheelbase

mm (in.)

2790 (109.8)

Front tread

mm (in.)

1575

(62.0)

Rear tread

mm (in.)

1575

(62.0)

Cargo load

kg (lb.)

66

(145)

Model:
1GR–FE and 2UZ–FE
3, 4

3, 4, 6
3, 5, 6
3, 6

Type:
1GR–FE engine
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
2UZ–FE engine
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
1GR–FE engine
94.0 
 95.0 (3.70 
 3.74)
2UZ–FE engine
94.0 
 84.0 (3.70 
 3.31)
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):
1GR–FE engine
2UZ–FE engine

3956 (241.4)
4664 (284.6)

∗1 :

Unladen vehicle
With two–wheel drive models
With four–wheel drive models
With roof rails
∗5 : With rear spoiler
∗6 : With rear height control air suspension
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :

352

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Fuel

Service specifications

Fuel type:
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
For improved vehicle performance, the
use of premium unleaded gasoline with
an Octane Rating of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.

ENGINE

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
87 (23.0, 19.1)

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
1GR–FE engine
Intake
0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Exhaust
0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)
2UZ–FE engine
Intake
0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
Exhaust
0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)
Spark plug type:
1GR–FE engine
DENSO
NGK

K20HR–U11
LFR6C11

2UZ–FE engine
DENSO
NGK

SK20R11
IFR6A11

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 5W–30

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
1.1 (0.043)
ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.
qt.):
1GR–FE engine
With filter
Without filter

5.2 (5.5, 4.6)
4.9 (5.2, 4.3)

2UZ–FE engine
With filter
Without filter

6.2 (6.5, 5.5)
5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

353

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

COOLING SYSTEM

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
1GR–FE engine
9.8 (10.4, 8.6)
2UZ–FE engine
12.3 (13,0, 10.8)

Fluid capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Coolant type:
“Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” is
filled in your Toyota vehicle. In order to
avoid technical problems, we strongly
recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long
Life Coolant” or equivalent.
With ethylene–glycol type coolant for a
proper corrosion protection of aluminum
components
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or
plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.
BATTERY
Open voltage∗ at 20
C (68
F):
12.6—12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2—12.4 V
Half charged
11.8—12.0 V
Discharged
∗:

Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off

Charging rates:
5 A max.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
TRANSFER

1GR–FE engine
Up to 2.0 (2.1, 1.8)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
1.4 (1.5, 1.2)

2UZ–FE engine
Up to 3.0 (3.2, 2.6)

Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Fluid type:
Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV

Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 75W–90

Change automatic transmission fluid only
as necessary.

DIFFERENTIAL (1GR–FE engine)

Generally, it is necessary to change
automatic transmission fluid only if your
vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions
listed
in your
“Scheduled
Maintenance
Guide”
or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
changing the automatic transmission fluid,
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type T–IV”
(ATF JWS3309 or NWS6500) to aid in
assuring optimum transmission performance.
Notice: Using automatic transmission
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type T–IV” may cause deterioration in
shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and
ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Two–wheel drive models
3.05 (3.2, 2.7)
Four–wheel drive models
Front
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)
Rear
3.05 (3.2, 2.7)
Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL–5
Recommended oil viscosity:
Front
SAE 75W–90
Rear
Above
SAE
Below
SAE

–18
C (0
F)
90
–18
C (0
F)
80W or 80W–90

354

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

DIFFERENTIAL (2UZ–FE engine)

BRAKES

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
55 (2.2)

Two–wheel drive models
3.05 (3.2, 2.7)
Four–wheel drive models
Front
1.4 (1.5, 1.2)
Rear
3.05 (3.2, 2.7)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL–5

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)

Recommended oil viscosity:

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)

Above
SAE
Below
SAE

–18
C (0
F)
90
–18
C (0
F)
80W or 80W–90

CHASSIS LUBRICATION
Propeller shafts:
Spiders and slide yokes
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
No.2

Parking brake adjustment when depressed
with the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf):
5—7 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III

355

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Tires

Fuses

Tire size, pressure and wheel size:
Tire size

Tire pressure
kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Wheel size

Front

Rear

P265/70R16 111S

220 (2.2, 32)

220 (2.2, 32)

16 
 7J∗1
16 
 7JJ∗2

P265/65R17 110S

220 (2.2, 32)

220 (2.2, 32)

17 
 7 1/2JJ

∗1 :
∗2 :

Vehicles with steel wheels
Vehicles with aluminum wheels

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing
wheels), see “Checking tire pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 332 through 337 in Section 7–2.
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
110 (11.5, 83)

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)
1. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse
2. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse
3. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high
mounted stoplight, shift lock control
system, anti–lock brake system, traction control system (two–wheel drive
models), active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models), vehicle stability control system, rear height control
air suspension, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, trailer brake controller,
trailer lights (tail lights)

356

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

11. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
12. HEATER NO.2 7.5 A: Air conditioning
system
13. AIRSUS NO.2 10 A: Rear height control air suspension

Instrument panel

4. AC115V INV 15 A: AC inverter
5. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
6. OBD 7.5 A: On–board diagnosis system
7. HEAD (LO RH) 10
headlight (low beam)

A:

Right–hand

8. HEAD (LO LH) 10 A: Left–hand headlight (low beam)
9. HEAD (HI RH) 10 A: Right–hand headlight (high beam)
10. HEAD (HI LH) 10 A: Left–hand headlight (high beam)

20. ALT–S 7.5 A: Charging system
21. HORN 10 A: Horns
22. A/F HEATER 15 A: No circuit
23. TRN–HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights,
emergency flashers

14. SEAT HEATER 25 A: Seat heaters

24. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

15. DEFOG 30 A: Rear window defogger,
multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

25. EFI 20 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system

16. MIR HEATER 10 A: Outside rear view
mirror heater

26. DR/LCK 20 A: Power door lock system

17. DOME 10 A: Interior light, personal
lights, wireless remote control system,
door courtesy lights, rear seat audio
system, gauge and meter, vanity lights,
instrument panel lights, running board
lights, multiplex communication system
18. RADIO NO.1 20 A: Audio system, navigation system
19. ECU–B 10 A: Anti–lock brake system,
navigation system, traction control system (two–wheel drive models), active
traction control system (four–wheel
drive models), vehicle stability control
system, air conditioning system, multiplex communication system, theft deterrent system

27. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter
28. RADIO NO.2 20 A: Audio system
29. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, anti–lock brake system, traction control system (two–wheel drive
models), active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models), vehicle stability control system, stop light, meter
and gauge
30. SRS 10 A: SRS airbag system
31. GAUGE 7.5 A: Meter and gauge
32. STA NO.2 7.5 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

357

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

33. FR WIP–WSH 30 A: Windshield wipers
and washer
34. 4WD 20 A: Four–wheel drive control
system
35. D P/SEAT 30 A: Driver’s power seat
36. P P/SEAT 30 A: Front passenger’s
power seat
37. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
38. RR WSH 15 A: Rear window washer,
multiplex communication system
39. ECU–IG 10 A: Shift lock control system, power windows, anti–lock brake
system, traction control system (two–
wheel drive models), active traction
control system (four–wheel drive models), vehicle stability control system,
electric moon roof, multiplex communication system, theft deterrent system,
rear height control air suspension

40. IG1 15 A: Anti–lock brake system,
traction control system (two–wheel
drive models), active traction control
system (four–wheel drive models), vehicle stability control system, air conditioning system, charging system, rear
window defogger, back–up lights, turn
signal lights, emergency flashers, seat
heaters, AC inverter, instrument panel
light control, auto anti–glare inside rear
view mirror, SRS airbag system
41. STA 7.5 A: No circuit
42. SECU/HORN 10 A: Theft deterrent system
43. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, license plate
lights, parking lights, instrument panel
light control, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, instrument panel lights,
meter and gauge, grove box light
44. ACC 7.5 A: Power outlets, outside rear
view mirrors, audio system, navigation
system, rear seat audio system, shift
lock control system, instrument panel
lights
45. CIG 10 A: No circuit

Fuses (type B)
46. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system
47. AIRSUS 50 A: Rear height control air
suspension
48. AM1 50 A: All components in “ACC”,
“CIG”, “IG1”, “ECU–IG”, “FR WIP–
WSH”, “RR WIP”, “RR–WSH”, “4WD”,
and “STA” fuses
49. TOWING BRK 30 A: Trailer brake controller
50. J/B 50 A: All components in “PWR
OUTLET”, “D P/SEAT”, “P P/SEAT”,
“POWER”, “TAIL” and “SECU/HORN”
fuses
51. BATT CHG 30 A: Trailer sub battery
52. TOWING
lights)

40

A:

Trailer

lights

(tail

53. ABS MTR 40 A: Anti–lock brake system, traction control system (two–wheel
drive models), active traction control
system (four–wheel drive models), vehicle stability control system
54. AM2 30 A: Starter system, “IGN”,
“GAUGE”, “STA NO.2” and “SRS” fuses

358

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

55. ABS SOL 50 A: Anti–lock brake system, traction control system (two–wheel
drive models), active traction control
system (four–wheel drive models), vehicle stability control system
56. POWER 30 A: Power windows, electric
moon roof
Fuses (type C)
57. ALT 140 A: All components in “AM2”,
“ALT–S”,
“DR/LCK”,
“TRN–HAZ”,
“HORN”,
“RADIO
NO.2”,
“EFI”,
“TOWING”, “ABS MTR”, “ABS SOL”
and “ETCS” fuses

359

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

360

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

9

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS AND UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADING
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and uniform
tire quality grading
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

361

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy
campaign.
However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

Uniform tire quality grading
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline
toll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or
366–0123 in Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.
Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/
or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire
quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this
information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger car
tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades. Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A

362

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and a half (1–1/2) times
as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C, and they represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include
cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this
tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

363

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

364

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Instrument panel overview
1. Side vents
2. Side defroster outlets
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Personal lights
6. Electric moon roof switch
7. Garage door opener
8. Auxiliary boxes
9. Glove box
10. Automatic transmission selector lever
11. Power door lock switches
12. Power window switches
13. Seat heater switches
14. “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch
15. Rear vents
16. Trash holder
17. Height select switch
18. “DAC” switch
19. Front cup holders
20. Tilt steering lock release lever

2

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

21. Telescopic steering lock release lever
22. Parking brake pedal
23. Window lock switch
24. Power rear view mirror control switches

3

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1. Instrument panel light control dial
2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
3. Audio remote control switches
4. Wiper and washer switches
5. Power back window switch
6. Car audio
7. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
8. Engine immobiliser/theft deterrent
system indicator light
9. Multi–information display
10. Emergency flasher switch
11. Air conditioning controls
12. Auxiliary box
13. Back window and rear view mirror
defogger switch
14. Four–wheel drive control switch knob
(full–time four–wheel drive models) or
multi–mode control switch knob
(multi–mode four–wheel drive models)
15. Ignition switch
16. Cruise control switch
17. Hood lock release lever

4

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

18. Fuel filler door opener
19. “TRAC OFF” switch
20. Center differential lock switch
21. Power outlet main switch

5

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Instrument cluster overview

1. Trip meter reset button

4. Speedometer

7. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Tachometer

5. Fuel gauge

8. Odometer and two trip meters

3. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights

6. Low fuel level warning light

9. Odometer/two trip meter changeover
button

6

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel
Brake system warning light∗1
Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1


 Vehicle stability control system warning
light∗1


 Traction control system warning light∗1
(two–wheel drive models)


 Active traction control system warning light∗1
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

(four–wheel drive models)


 Downhill assist control system warning
light∗1 (four–wheel drive models)

Discharge warning

or

light∗1


 Hill–start assist control system warning
light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light∗1

Anti–lock brake system warning light∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning
light∗1 (for vehicles sold in Canada)
Engine immobiliser/theft deterrent system
indicator light

7

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Headlight high beam indicator light

Vehicle stability control system off indicator light
(four–wheel drive models)

Turn signal indicator lights

Downhill assist control system indicator light
(four–wheel drive models)

Automatic transmission indicator lights
(5–speed)

Height control indicator lights

Automatic transmission indicator lights
(4–speed)

Height control “OFF” indicator light∗4

Four–wheel drive indicator light∗2
(multi–mode four–wheel drive models)
Low speed four–wheel drive indicator light∗3
(four–wheel drive models)
Center differential lock indicator light∗3
(four–wheel drive models)
Slip indicator light
Traction control system off indicator light
(two–wheel drive models)

Cruise control indicator light∗5
∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :
∗5 :

For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 117 in Section 1–5.
If this light flashes, see “Four–wheel drive system” on page
141 in Section 1–6.
If this light flashes, see “Four–wheel drive system” on page
138 and on page 141 in Section 1–6.
If this light flashes, see “Rear height control air suspension”
on page 158 in Section 1–6.
If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 164 in
Section 1–6.

8

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
12
14
23
26
29
31
31
33
35

9

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Keys
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

Your vehicle is supplied with the two
kinds of keys.
1. Master keys (black)—These keys work
in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will
need one of them to make a new key
with a built–in transponder chip.
2. Sub key (gray)—This key does not
work in the glove box.
A transponder chip for engine immobiliser
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.

NOTICE
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following
precautions:
 When starting the engine, do not
use the key with a key ring resting
on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.

10

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

 Do not cover the key grip with any
material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
 Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
 Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under the direct sunlight.
 Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

 When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of other vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

 Do not bend the key grip.

 Do not use the key with electromagnetic materials.

11

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Engine immobiliser system

KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

The engine immobiliser system is a
theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head
transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when
the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered ID code for
the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the
key is removed from the ignition switch.
The indicator light will start flashing to
show the system is set.
If any of the following indicator conditions
occurs, contact your Toyota dealer.


 The indicator light stays on except
when the theft deterrent system is setting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
system” on page 31 in this Section.)


 The indicator light does not start flashing when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.


 The indicator light flashes unsteady.

12

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Inserting the registered key in the ignition
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The
indicator light will go off.
For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built–in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser system. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, the proper
operation of the system cannot be
guaranteed.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

For vehicles sold in Canada

FCC ID: MOZ RI–20BTY
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS–210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

13

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Side doors
This double key turning operation to unlock all the side doors and back door can
be changed to a single key turning operation. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.

When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked with a key, the interior
light, luggage compartment light, ignition
switch light and running board lights (on
some models) will come on and remain on
for about 15 seconds before fading out.
(For details, see “Interior light” on page
105, “Luggage compartment light” on page
107, “Ignition switch light” on page 108
and “Running board lights” on page 108
in Section 1–4.)

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
INSIDE LOCK KNOB

WITH

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.

To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

All the side doors and back door lock and
unlock simultaneously with the driver’s
door. In the driver’s door lock, turning the
key once will unlock the driver’s door and
twice in succession will unlock all the side
doors and back door simultaneously.

The front doors can be opened by pulling
the inside handles even if the lock knobs
are in the locked position.

14

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION

Driver’s side

WITH

Push the switch.

Do not pull the inside handle of the
front doors while driving. The doors
will open and an accident may occur.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
children be placed in the rear seat of
the vehicle.

To lock: Push the switch down on the
front side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
rear side.
Operating the switch simultaneously locks
or unlocks all the side doors and back
door.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
The front doors cannot be locked if you
leave the key in the ignition switch.

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

If you do either of the following, no side
door or back door can be unlocked with
the power door lock switch.


 Lock all the side doors and back door
Front passenger’s side

with the key or wireless remote control
transmitter when all the side doors and
back door are closed.


 Open the driver’s door or front passenger’s door and move the inside lock
knobs of both front doors to the lock
position, then close the front doors.

15

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The power door lock switch can be reset
in the following ways.

CAUTION


 Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

 Unlock all the side doors and back

Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident. It also helps
prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

door with the key or wireless remote
control transmitter.


 Unlock the driver’s door or front passenger’s door with the inside lock
knob, and then unlock all the doors
and back door with the power door
lock switch.
This unlocking protection with the power
door lock switch can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

REAR DOOR CHILD–PROTECTORS
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
This feature allows you to lock a rear
door so it can be opened from the outside
only, not from inside. We recommend using this feature whenever small children
are in the vehicle.

16

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Automatic door locking and
unlocking functions
You can set the following automatic
door locking and unlocking functions.

(d) Unlocking linked with opening the
driver’s door

(a) Locking linked with the shift position

All the side doors and back door are unlocked automatically when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned from “ON” to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

All the side doors and back door are
locked automatically when the automatic
transmission selector lever is moved out
of the “P” position with the engine running
(including ignition switch in the “ON” position) and all the side doors and back door
are closed. This function is the default
setting for new vehicles.

SETTING THE FUNCTIONS
1. Close all the side doors and back door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.

(b) Unlocking linked with the shift position

3. Within 10 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position;

All the side doors and back door are unlocked automatically when the automatic
transmission selector lever is moved to
the “P” position with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position.

Push and hold the front of the power
door lock switch for 5 seconds with the
automatic transmission selector lever in
the “P” position.

(c) Locking
speed

linked

with

the

vehicle

All the side doors and back door are
locked automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher. However, if any of the side doors and
back door is unlocked during driving, this
auto locking function will not operate until
the unlocked door is opened once.


 To set function (a)


 To set function (b)
Push and hold the rear of the power
door lock switch for 5 seconds with the
automatic transmission selector lever in
the “P” position.


 To set function (c)
Push and hold the front of the power
door lock switch for 5 seconds with the
automatic transmission selector lever in
any position except “P”.


 To set function (d)
Push and hold the rear of the power
door lock switch for 5 seconds with the
automatic transmission selector lever in
any position except “P”.
All the side doors and back door are automatically lock and unlock when you release the power door lock switch. This
indicates that the function is set. If all the
side doors and back door do not lock and
unlock, the time the switch was held may
have been too short or too long. Perform
the procedure over again starting from
step 1.
If you want to cancel a function, repeat
the procedure. Each time you perform the
procedure, the function is set or cancelled.

17

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all the side
doors and back door, open the back
window or activate the “PANIC” mode
from a distance within approximately 1
m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE SIDE
DOORS AND BACK DOOR
To lock and unlock all the side doors
and back door, push the switches of
the transmitter slowly and securely.

Locking operation

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All the
side doors and back door are locked simultaneously. At this time one beep will
be heard, and the turn signal lights flash
once.
Check to see that all the side doors and
back door are securely locked.
If any of the side doors or the back door
is not securely closed, locking cannot be
performed by the “LOCK” switch and a
beep will sound continuously for 10 seconds. However, if the key is in the ignition
switch, a beep will not sound.
To stop the buzzer, close all the side
doors and back door securely or push the
“UNLOCK” switch.

Unlocking operation

The buzzer can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switch
once to unlock the driver’s door alone.
Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds
unlocks all the side doors and back door
simultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”
switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,
and the turn signal lights flash twice.
This double switch operation to unlock all
the side doors and back door can be
changed to a single switch operation. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
When the “UNLOCK” switch is pressed,
the interior light, luggage compartment
light, ignition switch light and running
board lights (on some models) will come
on and remain on for about 15 seconds
before fading out. (For details, see “Interior light” on page 105, “Luggage compartment light” on page 107, “Ignition switch
light” on page 108 and “Running board
lights” on page 108 in Section 1–4.)
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
side doors and back door will be automatically locked again.
The timing for the automatic door lock
function can be changed. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

18

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.


 Cancelling the wireless door locking or
unlocking function


 Cancelling the flash of the turn signal
lights


 Changing the volume of beep sound
OPENING THE BACK WINDOW

“PANIC” SWITCH

To open the back window, push the
back window open switch of the transmitter for about 1 second. The window
will fully open.

Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows the
horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights, tail lights and turn signal
lights, and turns on the interior and
luggage compartment lights.

At this time, you can hear a beep.
If the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the back window cannot be opened
by the back window open switch.
To open the back window with the key,
see “Power back window” on page 26 in
this Section.
The back window opening program by
wireless remote control can be changed or
disabled. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter vehicle theft when you witness anyone attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
alarm midway, push any of the switch on
the wireless remote control transmitter.
You can also stop the alarm by turning
the ignition key from “LOCK” to the “ON”
position.

19

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The “PANIC” mode does not work when
the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
This alarm function can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
WIRELESS
TRANSMITTER

REMOTE

CONTROL

The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause
damage to the transmitter.


 Do not leave the transmitter on places
where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.


 Do not disassemble it.

 Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.

If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors, back window
or alarm, operate from a normal distance:


 Check for closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.


 The battery may have been consumed.
Check the battery in the transmitter. To
replace the battery, see following
“REPLACING THE BATTERY”.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

If you lose your transmitter, contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident. (See “If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter” on page 299 in
Section 4.)


 Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control transmitters for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.

20

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:


 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.


 Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.


 Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.


 Consult the dealer or an experienced

For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

radio / TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

21

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

REPLACING THE BATTERY
For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
components.

NOTICE
 When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
 Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.

1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
transmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

NOTICE
Do not bend the terminals.

 Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the transmitter battery by following these procedures:

22

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Power windows
 Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the transmitter battery insertion
and that dust or oils do not adhere
to the transmitter case.
 Close the transmitter case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

3. Put a new transmitter battery with positive (+) side up.

The windows can be operated with the
switch on each side door.

Close the transmitter case securely.

The power windows work when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.

NOTICE
 Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter battery should be faced correctly.
 Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.

Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, all the power windows work for 43
seconds even after the ignition switch is
turned off. It stops working when either
front door is opened.
The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switch
tells you the switch can be operated.

 Do not touch or move any components inside of the transmitter, or
it may interfere with proper operation.

23

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

If the battery is disconnected or run
down, the power window may not operate
automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.
In any of these cases, you should normalize the power window.

Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

To normalize the power window:
1. Push down the power window switch
and lower the window halfway.
2. Pull up the switch until the window
closes and hold the switch for a second.
Automatic operation: Push the switch
completely down or pull it completely up,
and then release it. The window will fully
open or close. To stop the window partway, lightly move the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.
Jam protection function: During automatic closing operation or key off closing operation, the window stops and opens half
way if something gets caught between the
window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

Make sure that the window opens and
closes automatically. If the power window
cannot be operated properly, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION


 Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.


 The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.

24

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Window
lock
switch

OPERATING
WINDOWS

THE

PASSENGERS’

Use the switch on each passenger’s
door or the switches on the driver’s
door that control each passenger’s window.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows
cannot be operated.

25

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Power back window
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.


 Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury.
When anyone closes the power windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.


 When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.


 Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.


 Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power window switches and
get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

The back window can be operated with
the switch on the instrument panel or
the key operation in the back door keyhole.
You can open the back window when the
back window wiper is working. At that
time, the wiper stops working until the
window is closed again.
If the back window is not fully closed, the
back window wiper, washer and defogger
will not work. (See “Back window wiper
and washer” on page 110 and “Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers” on page 110 in Section 1–4.)

26

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If the battery is disconnected or run
down, the power back window may not
operate automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the
battery. In any of these cases, you should
normalize the power back window with the
power back window switch.
To normalize the power back window:
1. Push the “” (down) switch and lower
the window halfway.
2. Push the “
” (up) switch until the window closes and hold the switch for a
second.
Make sure that the window opens and
closes automatically. If the power back
window cannot be operated properly, have
it checked by your Toyota dealer.
OPERATING FROM INSIDE
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
Normal operation: To open or close the
back window, quickly push and release the
“” (down) or “
” (up) switch.

Automatic operation: To open or close
the back window, push and hold the “”
(down) or “
” (up) switch. The window
will fully open or close. To stop the window partway, push the switch on either
the “” (down) or “
” (up) side briefly.
Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, it works for 43 seconds even after
the ignition switch is turned off. It stops
working when either front door is opened.
Jam protection function: During automatic closing operation or key off closing operation, the window stops and opens half
way if something gets caught between the
window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the back window cannot
be operated.

CAUTION


 Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.


 The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.

27

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE
The back window can be opened and
closed with the key operation in the back
door keyhole.
To open: Turn the key fully counterclockwise and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the window
begins to open. To stop the window partway, release the key.
To close: Turn the key fully clockwise and
hold it.
After the door is locked, the window begins to close. To stop the window partway,
release the key.
This door key linked function can be disabled. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.
Jam protection function: During closing
operation, the window stops and opens
half way if something gets caught between
the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.


 Before you close the power back
window, always make sure there is
nobody around the power back window. You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury.
When anyone closes the power
back window, make sure he or she
operates the window safely.


 When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power
back window switch without supervision. Use the window lock switch
to prevent them from making unexpected use of the switch.


 Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.

28

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Back door
Make sure that the back door opens. If
the back door cannot be opened properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.


 Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power back window switch
and get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

The back door can be locked or unlocked
in the following ways.


 All the side doors and back door lock
and unlock simultaneously with the
back door. Insert the key into the keyhole, turn it clockwise to lock and turn
it counterclockwise to unlock.


 Keep the back window closed while
driving. This not only keeps the
luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.


 Never try jamming any part of your


 Operate the power door lock switch.
(See “Side doors” on page 14 in this
Section.)
To open the back door, pull up the back
door opener.


 Operate the wireless remote control.
(See “—Wireless remote control” on
page 18 in this Section.)

body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.

The back door can be opened when the
vehicle is stopped.


 The jam protection function may

If the back door opener does not operate
except when the battery is disconnected
or run down, contact your Toyota dealer.

locked and unlocked simultaneously
with the driver’s door. (See “Side
doors” on page 14 in this Section.)

If the battery is disconnected or run
down, the back door does not open after
you reconnect, replace or recharge the
battery. In any of these cases, you should
normalize the back door.

If the battery terminal is disconnected and
reconnected, the back door will be automatically locked. Be careful not to lock
your keys in the vehicle.

not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.
To open the back window with the wireless remote control transmitter, see
“—Wireless remote control” on page 18 in
this Section.


 All the side doors and back door are

To normalize the back door, unlock it with
the key, remote control transmitter or power door lock switch, see “Side doors” on
page 14 in this Section.

29

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

When all the side doors and back door
are unlocked simultaneously with a key,
the interior light, luggage compartment
light, ignition switch light and running
board lights (on some models) will come
on and remain on for about 15 seconds
before fading out. (For details, see “Interior light” on page 105, “Luggage compartment light” on page 107, “Ignition switch
light” on page 108 and “Running board
lights” on page 108 in Section 1–4.)
The back window can be opened and
closed with the key operation in the back
door keyhole. (For details, see “Power
back window” on page 26 in this Section.)

CAUTION


 Keep the back window and back
door closed while driving. This not
only keeps the luggage from being
thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.


 Careful attention is needed so as
not to get your fingers trapped as
the back door automatically closes
when it has not been fully closed.
When closing the back door, the inside
strap can be used to make the reach
easier.
To close the back door, lower it and press
down on it. After closing the back door,
try pulling it up to make sure it is securely closed.
Back door closer: When the back door
has not been fully closed, it is automatically closed completely.
See “Luggage stowage precautions” on
page 253 in Section 2 for precautions
when loading luggage.


 Never allow a child to operate the
back door.

NOTICE
 To avoid damage to the back door
dampers, do not apply any force,
paint or let any other foreign matter
on them.
 Do not apply excessive force when
the back door closer is operating.
Otherwise, the back door closer
may become defective.

30

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Hood

Theft deterrent system

To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure
it locks into place. If necessary, press
down gently on the front edge to lock it.

To deter vehicle theft, the system is
designed to sound an alarm if any of
the side doors, back door or hood is
forcibly unlocked or opened or the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected when the vehicle is locked.
The
and
turn
and

alarm blows the horn intermittently
flashes the headlights, tail lights and
signal lights, and turns on the interior
luggage compartment lights.

31

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The system will automatically be set after
30 seconds. When the system is set, the
indicator light will start flashing again.


 If the battery terminal is disconnected

4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.

The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.
CANCELING THE SYSTEM

and then reconnected.


 If the ignition is hotwired.

If the alarm has been activated and the
key is not in the ignition switch, all the
side doors and back door will re–lock automatically.

The system will cancel under the any of
the following conditions:

After one minute, the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will starts
flashing again.

SETTING THE SYSTEM


 Any of the side doors, back door or

Reactivating the alarm

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position and remove it.


 Any of the side doors or the back door

The indicator light will start flashing when
the key is removed from the ignition
switch. (See “Engine immobiliser system”
on page 12 in this Section for details.)


 The key is inserted into the ignition.

 The battery terminal is reconnected.

2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
3. Close and lock all the side doors, back
door and hood.
The indicator light will remain on when all
the side doors, back door and hood are
closed and locked.

hood is opened.
is unlocked.

Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.
The alarm will activate again under the
same
circumstances
described
in
“Activating the system”.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Stopping the alarm

Activating the system

The alarm will be stopped by the following
these ways:

The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:


 If any of the side doors is unlocked or
opened without the key or wireless remote control transmitter, or if the back
door or hood is forcibly opened.


 Unlock any of the side doors or the
back door with the key or wireless remote control transmitter.


 Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”
to “ON” position.
These ways cancel the system at the
same time.

32

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Fuel tank cap
If the battery becomes discharged due to
the vehicle being unused for a long time,
etc., when the battery is recharged or replaced, the system will give the alarm. If
this happens, immediately unlock any of
the side doors or the back door with the
key or the wireless remote control transmitter, and the alarm will stop.
TESTING THE SYSTEM
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The side doors and back door should
be locked with the key or wireless remote control transmitter. Be sure to
wait until the indicator light goes off or
starts flashing.
3. Unlock any side door from the inside.
The system should activate the alarm.
4. Stopping the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors and hood. When testing the
hood, also check that the system is
activated when the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected.
If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
lever.
When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION


 Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.


 When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

33

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

3. The removed cap can be stored on
the back side of the fuel filler door.
Position the cap so that the hooks point
to the left and right or up and down, and
set it in the receptacle on the back side
of the door.
When installing the cap, turn the cap
clockwise until you hear one click.
When you hear the click, the cap is
fully closed.
If the cap is not installed securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point 1), and
then turn it an additional 30 degrees
(to point 2). Pause slightly before
removing it.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

CAUTION

Although a click will be heard as you turn
the cap to point 1, it does not indicate
that the cap can be removed.


 Make sure the cap is installed se-

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.


 Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.
cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

34

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Electric moon roof
NOTICE

To operate the moon roof, use the
switch beside the personal lights.

To prevent damage to the cap, observe the following precautions.

The moon roof works when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.

 Apply force only in the turning direction to the cap. Do not pull or
pry it.

The sun shade can be opened or closed
by hand.
Sliding operation—

 Do not tighten the cap further after
you hear one click when installing.

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDE
OPEN” side.

Sliding operation

The roof will fully open automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch on
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side quickly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will open while the
switch is being pushed and stop when
released.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
When the moon roof is opened fully, the
deflector will raise to reduce the entering
of the strong wind. The angle of the deflector will be adjusted according to the
vehicle speed.
To close: Push the switch on the “TILT
UP” side.

Tilting operation

35

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The roof will fully close automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch on
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side quickly.

Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, it works for 43 seconds even after
the ignition switch is turned off. It stops
working when either front door is opened.

When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will close while the
switch is being pushed and stop when
released.

Jam protection function:

Tilting operation—
To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILT
UP” side.
The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch on
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side quickly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the
switch is being pushed and stop when
released.
To tilt down: Push the switch on the
“SLIDE OPEN” side.
The roof will fully tilt down automatically.
To stop the roof partway, push the switch
on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side quickly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will tilt down while
the switch is being pushed and stop when
released.


 If something gets caught between the
moon roof and frame during slide closing operation, the moon roof stops and
opens half way, and the deflector stops
and raises fully.


 If something gets caught between the
moon roof and frame during tilting
down operation, the moon roof stops
and opens fully.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
If the battery is disconnected or run
down, the moon roof may not operate
automatically and the jam protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.
In any of these cases, you should normalize the moon roof.
To normalize the moon roof, push and
hold the switch on the “TILT UP” side until
the moon roof tilts all the way up and
then tilts down a little automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and
closes automatically. If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked
by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you
must do the following.


 While the vehicle is moving, always
keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly
or if the vehicle is involved in an
accident.


 Before you close the moon roof,
always make sure there is nobody
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the moon roof, first
make sure it is safe to do so.

36

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Be sure to remove the ignition key
when you leave your vehicle.


 Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the moon roof switch and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.


 Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.


 Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.


 The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the moon roof is fully
closed.

37

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

38

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Seats, Seat belts, Steering wheel and Mirrors
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fold–down rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti–glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto anti–glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear side–view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40
40
46
48
49
49
50
59
66
73
90
90
91
93
94
95
95

39

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Front seats—
—Front seat precautions
Seats

(on vehicles with SRS front airbags)

While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

Driver seat

CAUTION


 Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow passengers to sit on top
of a folded–down seatback, or in
the luggage compartment or cargo
area. Persons not properly seated
and/or properly restrained by seat
belts can be severely injured in the
event of emergency braking or a
collision.


 During driving, do not allow passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
severe injuries can occur in the
event of emergency braking or a
collision.


 Slightly recline the back of the
CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:


 Move your seat to the rear as far

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non–slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.


 If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.

as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

40

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Front seat precautions
(on vehicles with SRS side
airbags)
Front passenger seat

CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.

—Seat adjustment precautions

CAUTION

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in
the driver and front passenger seats.
Observe the following precautions.


 Adjustments should not be made


 Do not lean against the front door
when the vehicle is in use, since
the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously injured.


 Do not use seat accessories which
cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.


 Do not modify or replace the seats
or
upholstery
of
front
seats
equipped with side airbags. Such
changes may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

while the vehicle is moving, as the
seat may unexpectedly move and
cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.


 When adjusting the seat, be careful
that the seat does not hit a passenger or luggage.


 After adjusting the seat position, release the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.


 After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.


 Do not put objects under the seats.
Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat–lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

41

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)

 While adjusting the seat, do not put
your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTING
KNOB
To change the angle of the seat cushion on the front side, turn the knob
either way.
3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER
To change the height of the seat, pull
up or push down the lever.
4. SEATBACK
LEVER

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

42

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Adjusting front seats (power
seat)
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under
the lap belt during a collision, avoid
reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear
collision when the driver and the passenger are sitting up straight and
well back in the seats. If you are
reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen. In the event
of a frontal collision, the more the
seat is reclined, the greater the risk
of personal injury.
5. SEAT
LUMBAR
ADJUSTING SWITCH

SUPPORT

1. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,
SEAT CUSHION ANGLE AND SEAT
HEIGHT ADJUSTING SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
2. SEATBACK
SWITCH

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.

Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumber support will change
while the switch is pushed.

43

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Flattening seatbacks
(manual seat)
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under
the lap belt during a collision, avoid
reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear
collision when the driver and the passenger are sitting up straight and
well back in the seats. If you are
reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces
directly to the abdomen. In the event
of a frontal collision, the more the
seat is reclined, the greater the risk
of personal injury.
3. SEAT
LUMBAR
ADJUSTING SWITCH

SUPPORT

Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumber support will change
while the switch is pushed.

1. Remove the head restraint. Hold the
center of the lever and pull it up.
Then slide the seat further forward
than the front–most lock position.

2. Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever to unlock and push down the
seatback.
When returning the seatback upright, be
careful not to make yourself hit by the
seatback which will bound with considerable spring force.
After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

44

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Flattening seatbacks
(power seat)
CAUTION


 Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.


 After putting back the seat, try
pushing the seat and seatback forward and rearward to make sure it
is secured in place. Be certain to
replace head restraint.

1. Remove the head restraint. Push the
seat position adjusting switch forward to slide the seat further forward than the front–most position.

2. Move the seatback angle adjusting
switch backward to flatten the seatback.
After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

45

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Fold–down rear seats
CAUTION


 Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.


 After putting back the seat, try
pushing the seat and seatback forward and rearward to make sure it
is secured in place. Be certain to
replace head restraint.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT
Stow the rear center seat belt buckle as
shown in the illustration.

If you are using a trash holder, lower
it.

This prevents the seat belt buckle from
falling out when you fold the seatback.

NOTICE
The seat belt buckle must be stowed
before you fold the seatback.

46

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position.

2. Swing the bottom cushion up by
pulling the lock release strap.

3. Push the lock release button and
fold down the seatback.

If desired, each bottom cushion may be
swung up separately.

This will enlarge the luggage compartment
as far as the raised seat cushion. See
“Luggage stowage precautions” on page
253 in Section 2 for precautions when
loading luggage.
If desired, each seatback may be folded
separately.

47

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Head restraints
CAUTION
When returning seats to their original
position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent personal
injury in a collision or sudden stop:


 Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.


 Make sure the seat belts are not
WHEN RETURNING THE SEATBACK
If you cannot raise the seatback because of the locked seat belt, do not
try it forcibly. Release the lock of the
seat belt in the following way. Push in
the lower front edge of the seatback
cushion to slacken the seat belt (1) and
let the seat belt retract a little (2).

twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

Front


 Make sure the bottom cushion is
securely locked by trying to pull up
the edge of the cushion near the
lock release straps.


 Make sure to arrange the buckles of
the seat belts in their proper position and be ready to use.

Rear

48

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Armrest

Seat heaters

For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.
Front head restraints—You can also move
the head restraint forward or backward. If
such adjustment is desired, pull or push
the base of the head restraint.
Rear head restraints—When an occupant
sits on the rear seat, always pull up the
rear head restraint to the lock position.
The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

CAUTION


 Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.


 After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.


 Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

To use the armrest,
shown above.

pull

it

out as

This armrest is equipped with a cup holder and tray. (For details, see “Rear cup
holders and tray” on page 232 in Section
1–9.)

To turn on the seat heater, move the
dial forward (“L” dial for the left front
seat and “R” dial for the right front
seat). At this time, the indicator light
will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is operating.

NOTICE

Move the dial forward or backward to adjust to the desired temperature.

To prevent damage to the armrest,
avoid putting heavy loads on it.

To turn it off, move the dial backward
until it stops.
When the seat heater is not in use, move
the dial fully backward.
The key must be in the “ON” position to
operate seat heaters.

49

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;


 Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons or handicapped
persons


 Persons who have delicate skin

 Persons who are exhausted

 Persons who have taken alcohol or
drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)
To prevent the seat overheating, do
not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.

NOTICE
 Do not put unevenly weighed objects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
 When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the heater
and seat surface.
 To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the system off
when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
on page 73 in this Section for details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

50

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Do not allow the child to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also do not let the child sit on
your lap. It does not provide sufficient
restraint.
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendation.


 Keep the belts clean and dry. If

CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:


 Use the belt for only one person at

they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners—they may severely weaken the
belts. (See “Cleaning the interior”
on page 305 in Section 5.)


 Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.

a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.


 Avoid reclining the seatbacks too
much. The seat belts provide maximum protection when the seatbacks
are in the upright position. (Refer
to the seat adjustment instructions.)


 Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or side doors.


 Inspect the belt system periodically.
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.

51

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Front and rear seat belts
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 73 in this Section.) To
free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.
Adjust the seat as needed (front seats
only) and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it
out of the retractor and insert the tab
into the buckle.

CAUTION

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor—


 After inserting the tab, make sure

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.


 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.


 If the seat belt does not function

To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
protect an adult occupant or your
child from injury.

52

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION

CAUTION
Take up
slack

Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
serious injuries in a collision.

Too high


 Both high–positioned lap belts and
loose–fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended result. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on hips
as possible.


 For your safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under your arm.

Keep as low on
hips as possible

Adjust the position
shoulder belts.

of

the

Position the lap belt as low as
on your hips—not on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch

lap and
possible
then adshoulder
plate.

53

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Stowing rear center seat belt
buckle

—Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer so
that the dealer can order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available
at your Toyota dealer.

To release the belt, press the buckle–release button and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

The rear center seat belt buckle can be
stowed when not in use.
Seat belt buckle must be stowed before
you fold the seat back. (See “Fold–down
rear seats” on page 46 in this Section.)

54

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Be sure to wear the seat belt with-

CAUTION

out the seat belt extender if you
can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.

When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
vehicle
accident,
increasing
the
chance of personal injury.


 Do not use the seat belt extender


 Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended.


 If the seat belt extender has been

when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.

55

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Front seat belt
pretensioners
CAUTION


 After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the seat belt extender is not
twisted.


 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.


 If the seat belt does not function
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle–release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle–release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed. It cannot
protect an adult occupant or your
child from injury.

The driver and front passenger’s seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe frontal impact.
When the airbag sensor detects the shock
of a severe frontal impact, the front seat
belts are quickly drawn back in by the
retractors so that the belts snugly restrain
the front seat occupants.
The front seat belt pretensioners are activated even with no passenger in the front
seat.
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in case of
collisions at a certain speeds and angles.

56

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

When the front seat belt pretensioners are
activated, an operating noise may be
heard and a small amount of smoke–like
gas may be released. This gas is harmless and does not indicate that a fire is
occurring.
Once the front seat belt pretensioners
have been activated, the seat belt retractors remain locked.

CAUTION

This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the front seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.

The front seat belt pretensioner system
mainly consists of the following components and their locations are shown in the
illustration.

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For
details, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Section 1–5.)

2. SRS warning light

1. Front airbag sensors
3. Front seat belt pretensioner assemblies
4. Airbag sensor assembly
The front seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.

Do not modify, remove, strike or open
the front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Doing so may
cause sudden operation of the front
seat belt pretensioners or disable the
system, which could result in death
or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injuries. Consult your Toyota dealer
about any repairs and modifications.

57

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
front seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.
 Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two–way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
 Repairs on or near the front seat
belt retractor assemblies
 Modification of the suspension system
 Modification of the front end structure
 Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
 Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console

This front seat belt pretensioner system
has a service reminder indicator to inform
the driver of operating problems. If any of
the following conditions occurs, this
indicates a malfunction of the airbags or
pretensioners. Contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.


 The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or the light remains on.


 The light comes on or flashes while

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:


 The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the front seat belt pretensioners to operate.


 Either front seat belt pretensioner assembly
or
surrounding
area
is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

driving.


 If either front seat belt does not retract
or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant
front seat belt pretensioner.

58

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger
when the SRS front airbags are inflated.

CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work together with
the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The SRS front airbags help to
reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s or
front passenger’s head or chest caused by
directly hitting the steering wheel or dashboard. The front passenger airbag is activated even with no passenger in the front
seat.


 The driver sit as far back as pos-


 If the seat belt extender has been
connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.

sible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.


 The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.


 All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.

59

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags are operating
properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For
details, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Section 1–5.)

However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are generally not
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low–
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

60

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Hitting a curb, edge
of pavement or
hard material

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the
forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an
impact results in a forward deceleration
beyond the designed threshold level, the
system triggers the airbag inflators. At this
time a chemical reaction in the inflators
very quickly fills the airbags with non–toxic gas to help restrain the forward motion
of the occupants. The airbags then quickly
deflate, so that there is no obstruction of
the driver’s vision should it be necessary
to continue driving.

Falling into or
jumping over
a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.

The SRS airbag system mainly consists of
the following components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
5. Driver’s seat position sensor

When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non–toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can physically and
safely exit the vehicle after a collision,
you should do so at the first opportunity.

6. Airbag sensor assembly
7. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.

61

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head are in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.


 Improperly seated and/or restrained

CAUTION


 The SRS airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver side and
front passenger side seat belt systems. The front seat occupants can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see
“Seat belts” on page 50 in this Section.

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying front airbag. An infant or child
who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” on page 73 in this
Section.

62

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the door
or around the door even if the child
is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.


 For

instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page
73 in this Section.

Move seat
fully back


 Never install a rear–facing child re-


 A forward–facing child restraint sys-

straint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the force of
the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious
injury to the child.

63

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Do not sit on the edge of the seat


 Do not allow a child to stand up or


 Do not put objects or your pets on

or lean over the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front airbags inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise
you may be killed or seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back
in the seat, and always use your
seat belt properly.

to kneel on the front passenger
seat, since the front airbag inflates
with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

or in front of the dashboard or
steering wheel pad that houses the
front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or cause death or
serious injury as they are projected
rearward by the force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver
and front passenger should not
hold objects in their arms or on
their knees.


 Do not hold a child on your lap or
in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 73 in this Section.

64

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag or airbag
sensor assembly. Doing so may
cause sudden SRS front airbag
inflation or disable the system,
which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repairs and modifications.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
 Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two–way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
 Modification of the suspension system
 Modification of the front end structure
 Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
 Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

This SRS front airbag system has a service reminder indicator to inform the driver
of operating problems. If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to service the vehicle.


 The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or the light remains on.


 The light comes on while driving.

65

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:


 The SRS front airbags have been inflated.


 The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outside passengers in
addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.


 The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

66

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help
reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side
airbags help to reduce injuries mainly to
the driver’s or front passenger’s chest and
the SRS curtain shield airbags help to
reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, front
passenger’s or rear outside passenger’s
head. The SRS side airbag and curtain
shield airbag on the passenger side are
activated even with no passenger in the
front seat or rear seat.
The curtain shield airbags may activate
even when the side airbags are not activated.
Be sure to wear your seat belt properly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger
when the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags are inflated.

CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags
inflate with considerable
force. To avoid potential death or serious injury when they inflate, the
driver, front passenger and rear outside passengers must:


 Wear their seat belts properly.

 Remain properly seated with their
back upright and against the seat at
all times.
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For
details, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 117 in Section 1–5.)

67

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system may not inflate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are not designed to inflate if
the vehicle is involved in a front or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low–speed side collision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
3. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
4. Curtain shield airbag sensors
5. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
6. Airbag sensor assembly

68

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with
non–toxic gas to help restrain the lateral
motion of the occupants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non–toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This gas is normally harmless; however, for those who
have delicate skin, it may cause a minor
skin irritation. Be sure to wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent
any potential skin irritation.

Front seats as well as parts of the front
pillar, and roof side may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags themselves will
not be hot. The airbags are designed to
inflate only once.

CAUTION


 The SRS side airbag and curtain
shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver side, and
front and rear outside passenger
side seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident,
the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts.
Wearing a seat belt during an accident reduces the chances of death
or serious injury or being thrown
out of the vehicle. For instructions
and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on
page 50 in this Section.


 Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by a deploying
airbag. An infant or child who is
too small to use a seat belt should
be properly secured using a child
restraint system. Toyota strongly
recommends that all infants and
children be placed in the rear seat
of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the safest
for infants and children. For instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” on page 73 in this
Section.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.

69

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Do not allow a child to lean his/her
head or any part of his/her body
against the front door or the area
of the seat, front pillar or roof side
from which the side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy even if he/
she is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page
73 in this Section.


 Do not lean against the door when


 Do not get your head closer to the

the vehicle is in use, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, you may be killed
or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when
you have a small child in the vehicle.

area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since
these airbags inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken
especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.


 Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the front
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.

70

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Do not allow a child to kneel on the


 Do not attach a cup holder or any


 Do not attach a microphone or any

passenger seat facing the passenger’s side door, since the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

other device or object around the
part where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front and
side pillars, roof side and assist
grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown
with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.

71

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Do not hook a hanger, heavy or
sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly.


 Do not use seat accessories which
cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.


 Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of front seats with
side airbags. Such changes may
disable the system or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally,
resulting in death or serious injury.


 Do not disassemble or repair the
front pillar and roof side rail containing the curtain shield airbags.
Such changes may disable the system or cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repairs and modifications.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.
 Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two–way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
 Modification of the suspension system
 Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
 Repairs made on or near the console

This SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system has a service reminder
indicator to inform the driver of operating
problems. If either of the following
conditions
occurs,
this
indicates
a
malfunction of the airbags. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.


 The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or the light remains on.


 The light comes on or flashes while
driving.

72

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:


 The SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags have been inflated.


 The portion of the doors (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.


 The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Toyota strongly urges the use of child
restraint systems for children small
enough to use them.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
page 50 in this Section for details.


 The portion of the front pillars and roof
side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the curtain shield airbags inside
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

73

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION


 For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.


 Toyota strongly urges use of a
proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
and is put on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.


 Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on the front seat. In
the event of an accident, the force
of the rapid inflation of the airbag
can cause death or serious injury if
a rear–facing child restraint system
is installed on the front seat.


 A forward–facing child restraint sys-


 Make sure that you have complied

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the force of
the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious
injury to the child.

with all installation instructions provided
by
the
child
restraint
manufacturer and that the system is
properly secured.


 On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the door
or around the door even if the child
is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.


 Do not use the seat belt extender
when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

74

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s
instructions which accompany the child
restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer of the system. General
directions are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.


 On vehicles with side airbags and

CAUTION
straint system on the front seat. In
the event of an accident, the force
of the rapid inflation of the airbag
can cause death or serious injury if
a rear–facing child restraint system
is installed on the front seat.

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the door
or around the door even if the child
is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.


 A forward–facing child restraint sys-


 After installing the child restraint

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the force of
the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious
injury to the child.

system, make sure it is secured in
place following the manufacturer’s
instructions. If it is not restrained
securely, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.


 Never install a rear–facing child re-

When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

75

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Types of child restraint
system
Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
page 86 in this Section.

(A) Infant seat

(C) Booster seat

The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 88 in this Section.

(B) Convertible seat

76

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Installation with seat belt

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat is used in rear–facing
position only.


 Do not install a child restraint sys-

CAUTION


 Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. This can cause death or
serious injury to the child and front
passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.


 If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

77

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION


 After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.


 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.


 If the seat belt does not function
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the child restraint system until
the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

78

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

3. While pressing
against the seat
let the shoulder
it will go to hold
ly.

the infant seat firmly
cushion and seatback,
belt retract as far as
the infant seat secure-

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle–release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

79

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Move seat
fully back

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat is used in forward–
facing and rear–facing position depending on the child’s age and size. When
installing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions about the applicable child’s
age and size as well as directions for
installing a child restraint system.


 A forward–facing child restraint sys-

CAUTION


 Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat because the force of the
rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child.

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the force of
the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious
injury to the child.

80

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the door
or around the door even if the child
is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.


 Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. This can cause death or
serious injury to the child and front
passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.


 If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

81

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION


 After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.


 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.


 If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the child restraint system until
the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted slightly, it cannot be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

82

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle–release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION
A booster seat is used in forward–facing position only.

83

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean against the door
or around the door even if the child
is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
Move seat
fully back

CAUTION


 A forward–facing child restraint system should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible, because the force of
the deploying front passenger airbag could cause death or serious
injury to the child.

1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run
the lap and shoulder belt through or
around the booster seat and child following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is
across the child’s shoulder and
lap belt is positioned as low as
on child’s hips. See “Seat belts”
50 in this Section for details.

84

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

correctly
that the
possible
on page

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION


 Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the
amount of protection in an accident
and cause serious injuries in a collision.


 If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from injury. Contact your
Toyota dealer immediately. Do not
use the child restraint seat until the
seat belt is fixed.


 Both high–positioned lap belts and
loose–fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended result. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on a
child’s hips as possible.

2. To remove the child restraint system,
press the buckle–release button and allow the belt to retract.


 For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.


 After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.


 Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

85

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Using a top strap
Anchor brackets

Symbol

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

Use the anchor brackets behind the rear
seatbacks to attach the top strap.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove the head restraint.

Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the location of the
anchor brackets.

86

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

2. Raise the anchor bracket.

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.

4. Replace the head restraint.

Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 73 in this Section.

CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

87

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages

Lower the anchor bracket when it is not
in use.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

Canada only

Type A

88

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system
indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

SYSTEM

For the installation details, refer to the
instruction manual equipped with each
product.

CAUTION


 When using the lower anchorages

Type A—
1. Widen the clearance between the
seat cushion and seatback a little
and confirm the position of the lower anchorages around the tag on the
seat cushion.
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto
the anchorages and tighten the lower
straps.
Type B—
1. Widen the clearance between the
seat cushion and seatback a little
and confirm the position of the lower anchorages around the tag on the
seat cushion.

for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.


 Push and pull the child restraint
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.


 Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. This can cause death or
serious injury to the child and front
passenger in case of sudden braking or a collision.

2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
Canada only

Type B

If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 86 in this Section.)

89

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Tilt and telescopic steering
wheel

Tilt steering wheel
CAUTION


 Do not adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.


 After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

To change the steering
hold the steering wheel,
release lever toward you,
ing wheel to the desired
lease the lever.

wheel angle,
pull the lock
tilt the steerangle and re-

When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as you release the
lock release lever.

ADJUSTMENT
TILT

OF

STEERING

To change the steering
hold the steering wheel,
release lever toward you,
ing wheel to the desired
lease the lever.

WHEEL

wheel angle,
pull the lock
tilt the steerangle and re-

When the steering wheel is in a low position, it will spring up as you release the
lock release lever.

90

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Outside rear view mirrors—
CAUTION


 Do not adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.


 After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down or forward and rearward to make sure it
is locked in position.
ADJUSTMENT
OF
STEERING COLUMN

TELESCOPIC

To change the steering wheel length,
push down the lock release lever, set
the steering wheel to the desired length
and return the lever to its original position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
On some models, when you push the
back window defogger switch, the heater
panels in the outside rear view mirrors will
quickly clear the surface. (See “Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers” on page 110 in Section 1–4.)

91

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Power rear view mirror
control
On some models, the outside rear view
mirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clear
the driver’s rear view when it rains. (For
details, see “Rain clearing mirrors” on
page 307 in Section 5.)

NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de–icer to free
the mirror.

CAUTION


 Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.


 On some models, since the mirror
surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the defogger switch is
on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror Push the switch in the desired
direction.
Mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

92

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Folding rear view mirrors

Anti–glare inside rear view
mirror
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in compact areas.
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

93

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Auto anti–glare inside rear
view mirror
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.
To turn off the automatic function, push
the “MIRROR” switch.
To turn on the automatic function again,
push the “MIRROR” switch.
Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
This mirror is equipped with auto anti–
glare function. The function is designed
to reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving.
When the ignition key is inserted and
turned on, the inside rear view mirror always turns on in the automatic function
mode.

When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.

CAUTION

To ensure correct functioning of an
anti–glare mirror sensor located on the
back side of the mirror, do not touch
or cover the sensor with your finger or
a piece of cloth, etc.

Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.

94

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Rear side–view mirrors

Sun visors—
Rear side–view mirrors are useful as a
secondary means of checking the area
to the rear of the vehicle.
Carefully check the area to the rear of the
vehicle by either looking directly or using
both outside and inside rear view mirrors.

Type A

Type B

95

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

CAUTION

To block out glare from the front—Swing
down the main sun visor (position 1).


 Type A—Do not extend the plate at

To block out glare from the side—Swing
down the main sun visor, remove it from
the hook and swing it to the lateral side
(position 2).

the end of the sun visor when the
visor is in the position 1. It can
cover the anti–glare inside rear
view mirror and obstruct the rear
view.

Type A—If glare comes from obliquely behind you, extend the plate at the end of
the visor (to position 3).
Type B—If glare comes from obliquely behind you, slide the main sun visor backward (to position 3).


 Type B—Slide the main sun visor
only when it
lateral side.
glare inside
obstruct the

is swung down to the
It can cover the anti–
rear view mirror and
rear view.

To block the glare from the front when the
main sun visor is swung to the lateral
side, swing down the sub visor.

96

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Vanity mirrors
To use the vanity mirrors, swing down
the main sun visor and slide the cover.
Type A—
The vanity light comes on when you slide
the cover.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when
the key is removed for 30 minutes or
more.

Type A

Type B

97

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

98

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running board lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . .

100
104
105
105
105
106
107
108
108
109
110
110

99

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Headlights and turn signals
(with automatic light control
system)
Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when all the side doors and back
door are closed with the ignition key in
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless remote control transmitter is pushed twice
simultaneously, the lights automatically
turn off immediately.
The time before the headlights turn off
can be changed. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position
above

2—Headlights

and

all

of

the

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all
of the lights in position 1
They automatically turn on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings.
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the driver’s side instrument
panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
The operating condition or sensitivity can
be changed. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

If the driver’s door is kept opened, the
lights automatically turn off after 30 minutes.
To turn them on again, turn the key to the
“ON” position or actuate the headlight
switch.
If you are going to park for over one
week, make sure the headlight switch is
off.

NOTICE

Automatic light cut off system
Position 1 or position 3 with the tail
lights on—
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.

100

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all
models sold in Canada and some models sold in U.S.A.)
Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can
make it easier for others to see the front
of your vehicle during the day. The DRL
system can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your front turn
signal lights come on when:


 The ignition is on with the engine running.


 The knob is in the “OFF” position,
position 1 or position 3 with the tail
lights on.


 The parking brake is released.
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
to the position 2 or position 3 with the
headlights on, or turn the ignition switch
off.
This DRL system can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

High–Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
On some models, the front turn signal
lights are on during daytime running light
system is on. For details, see “Daytime
running light system”.

101

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Headlights and turn signals
(without automatic light
control system)
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.

Position 2—
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when all the side doors and back
door are closed with the ignition key in
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
If the “LOCK” switch of the wireless remote control transmitter is pushed twice
simultaneously, the lights automatically
turn off immediately.
The time before the headlights turn off
can be changed. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position
above

2—Headlights

and

all

of

the

Automatic light cut off system
Position 1—

If the driver’s door is kept opened, the
lights automatically turn off after 30 minutes.
To turn them on again, turn the key to the
“ON” position or actuate the headlight
switch.
If you are going to park for over one
week, make sure the headlight switch is
off.

NOTICE

The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened with the ignition
key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.

102

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Daytime running light (DRL) system (all
models sold in Canada and some models sold in U.S.A.)
Daytime Running Light (DRL) system can
make it easier for others to see the front
of your vehicle during the day. The DRL
system can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your front turn
signal lights come on when:


 The ignition is on with the engine running.


 The knob is in the “OFF” position or
position 1.


 The parking brake is released.
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
to the position 2 or turn the ignition switch
off.
This DRL system can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

High–Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
On some models, the front turn signal
lights are on during daytime running light
system is on. For details, see “Daytime
running light system”.

103

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Emergency flashers
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

To turn on the
push the switch.

emergency

flashers,

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.

104

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Instrument panel light control

Front fog lights

Interior light

To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the dial.

To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight and turn signal switch lever. They will come on
only when the headlights are on low
beam.

Without rear seat audio system

With rear seat audio system

105

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Personal lights
To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.


 All the side doors and back door are

The interior light switch has the following
positions:

When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked using either the key or
the wireless remote control transmitter, the
light will come on and remain on for about
15 seconds before fading out.

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the side doors and back door is opened.
The light goes off when all the side doors
and back door are closed.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
Door linked operation—When the switch is
in the “DOOR” position and any of the
side doors and back door is opened, the
light will come on. After all the side doors
and back door are closed, the light remains on for about 15 seconds before
fading out.
Ignition switch linked operation—When the
switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the
ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the
light will come on. The light remains on
for about 15 seconds before fading out.

closed and locked.

The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.


 Cancelling the door key or the wireless
remote control transmitter linked operation


 Changing the duration of lighting
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened with the switch at “DOOR” position
for 30 minutes or more.

To turn on the personal lights, push the
lens. To turn the lights off, push the
lens once again.

However, in the following cases, the light
goes off immediately.


 All the side doors and back door are
closed when the ignition key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.

106

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Luggage compartment light

 Cancelling the door key or the wireless

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
Door linked operation—When the switch is
in the “DOOR” position and any of the
side doors and back door is opened, the
light will come on. After all the side doors
and back door are closed, the light remains on for about 15 seconds before
fading out.
Ignition switch linked operation—When the
switch is in the “DOOR” position, and the
ignition switch is turned to “LOCK”, the
light will come on. The light remains on
for about 15 seconds before fading out.
To turn on the luggage compartment
light, slide the switch.
The luggage compartment light switch has
the following positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the side doors and back door is opened.
The light goes off when all the side doors
and back door are closed.

remote control transmitter linked operation


 Changing the duration of lighting
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened with the switch at “DOOR” position
for 30 minutes or more.

However, in the following cases, the light
goes off immediately.


 All the side doors and back door are
closed when the ignition key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.


 All the side doors and back door are
closed and locked.
When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked using either the key or
the wireless remote control transmitter, the
light will come on and remain on for about
15 seconds before fading out.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.

107

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Ignition switch light

Running board lights
When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked using either the key or
the wireless remote control transmitter, the
light will come on and remain on for about
15 seconds before fading out.
The following adjustments can be made in
this system. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.


 Cancelling the door key or the wireless
remote control transmitter linked operation


 Changing the duration of lighting
For easy access to the ignition switch,
the ignition switch light comes on when
any of the side doors and back door is
opened or when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position.
The light remains on for about 15 seconds
after all the side doors and back door are
closed.
However, in the following cases, the light
goes off immediately.


 All the side doors and back door are
closed when the ignition key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.


 All the side doors and back door are

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened for 30 minutes or more.

Lighting the running boards and
ground helps you easily to get in
out of the vehicle in the night.
lights come on when any of the
doors is opened.

the
and
The
side

The lights remain on for about 15 seconds
after all the side doors are closed.
However, in the following cases, the light
go off immediately.


 All the side doors and back door are
closed and locked.


 The vehicle speed reaches 8 km/h (5
mph) or higher.

closed and locked.

108

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Windshield wipers and washer
When any of the side doors and back
door is unlocked using either the key or
the wireless remote control transmitter, the
lights will come on and remain on for
about 15 seconds before fading out.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened for 30 minutes or more.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 in
Section 7–3.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.
To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent

Position 2

Slow

Position 3

Fast

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust the
wiping time interval when the wiper lever
is in the intermittent position (position 1).
Twist the band upward to increase the
time between sweeps, and downward to
decrease it.

109

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Back window wiper and
washer

Back window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
If the back window is not fully closed, the
back window wiper and washer will not
work. Make sure the back window is fully
closed when using the back window wiper
and washer.

NOTICE
Do not operate the back window wiper if the back window is dry. It may
scratch the glass.

To turn on the back window wiper, twist
the lever knob upward.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent

Position 2

Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the back window,
twist the knob upward or downward as far
as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
automatically returns from these positions
after you release it.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 in
Section 7–3.

To defog or defrost the back window,
push the switch with the back window
closed.
The key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
back window will quickly clear the surface.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
the defogger is operating.
On some models, heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will also quickly
clear the surfaces.
Push the switch once again to turn the
defoggers off.
The system will automatically shut off after the defoggers have operated about 15
minutes.

110

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If the back window is not fully closed, the
back window defogger will not work. Make
sure the back window is fully closed when
using the back window defogger.
If the back window is opened while the
defogger is working, the defogger will automatically turn off. Even if the back window is fully closed after that, the defogger
will not automatically turn on.
Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop–and–go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.

CAUTION
On some models, since the mirror
surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the defogger switch is on.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the back
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

111

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

112

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114
114
115
116
117

113

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Engine coolant temperature
gauge

Fuel gauge
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.

Low fuel level
warning light

The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of the fuel remaining in the
tank when the ignition switch is on.
Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”
It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
The needle moves when braking, accelerating or making turns. This is caused by
the movement of the fuel in the tank.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
It is not a malfunction even if the needle
of the fuel gauge returns to “E” when the
ignition switch is turned to the “START”
position.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the ignition switch is
on. The engine operating temperature
will vary with changes in weather and
engine load.
If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:


 Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

 Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.

114

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Tachometer

 Idling for a long period with the air

NOTICE

conditioning on in stop–and–go traffic.


 Towing a trailer.

Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.

It is not a malfunction even if the needle
of the engine coolant temperature gauge
returns to “C” when the ignition switch is
turned to the “START” position.

NOTICE
 Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
 Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 282 in
Section 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over–revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.
It is not a malfunction even if the needle
of the tachometer returns to the bottom
position when the ignition switch is turned
to the “START” position.

115

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Odometer and two trip meters
This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

distance

2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.
3. Odometer/two trip meter changeover
button—Switches the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the changeover button. The meter display changes in the
order from the odometer to trip meter
A to trip meter B, then back to the
odometer each time you push.
4. Trip meter reset button—Resets
two trip meters to zero.

the

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the button until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

116

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(a)

Do this.

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.
(indicator and buzzer)

(b)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(c)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d)

Stop and check.

(e)

Stop and check.

(f)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g)

Low fuel level warning light

Fill up tank.

117

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(h)

(i)

Do this.
Replace engine oil.

or

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If brake system warning light is also on, stop
immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(j)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k)

Close all side doors and back door.

(l)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(m)

Stop and check.

118

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(n)

(o)

Do this.
Add washer fluid.

Key reminder buzzer

Remove key.

119

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and
Buzzer

Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:

This light comes on in the following cases
when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.


 The light does not come on even if the


 When the parking brake is applied...


 The light does not come on even if the

This light comes on for a few seconds
when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position on even after the parking
brake is released.

ignition key is turned on with the parking brake released.


 When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.


 When the hydraulic brake booster
fails...
If the hydraulic booster causes a problem
resulting in poor braking performance, the
warning light comes on and buzzer sounds
continuously.

parking brake is applied when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION


 The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS”
warning light.
In this case, not only the anti–lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not indicate the malfunction:


 The light may stay on for about 60

If any of the following conditions occurs, immediately stop your vehicle at
a safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.


 The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.


 The warning buzzer comes on together with the warning light.
In either case, this can indicate that
the brakes may not work properly
and your stopping distance will become longer. Depress the brake
pedal firmly and bring the vehicle
to an immediate stop.

seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.


 Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the warning light and
buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off
and the buzzer stops sounding after a
few seconds.


 You may hear a small sound in the
engine compartment
started or the brake
repeatedly. This is
sound of the brake
not a malfunction.

after the engine is
pedal is depressed
a pump pulsating
system, and it is

120

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer
This light and buzzer remind
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

you

to

Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or
“START”, the reminder light flashes and
buzzer come on if the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens
the belt, the light keeps on flashing and
the buzzer sounds for about 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front
Passenger’s
Reminder Light

Seat

(d) Discharge Warning Light
This light warns that the battery is being
discharged.
If it comes on while you are driving, there
is a problem somewhere in the charging
system.
The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning,
blower, radio, etc., and drive directly to
the nearest Toyota dealer or repair shop.

Belt

This light reminds you to buckle up the
front passenger’s seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or
“START”, the reminder light flashes if a
passenger sits in the front passenger seat
and does not fasten the seat belt. However, if a front passenger uses an additional
seat cushion, the light may not flash even
when the seat belt is not buckled up.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight and how it is placed on the seat,
built–in sensors in the seat cushion may
detect the pressure, causing the reminder
light to come on.

NOTICE
Do not continue driving if the engine
drive belt is broken or loose.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.

121

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position and
goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is
operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
followings.


 Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.


 Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp will not go off even after the
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...


 There is a problem somewhere in the
engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.

Emissions inspection and maintenance
(I/M) programs

If the engine speed does not increase with
the accelerator pedal depressed down,
there may be a problem somewhere in
your electronic throttle control system.

Your vehicle may not pass a state
emission inspection if the malfunction
indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
emission
control
system
and
OBD
(On–Board Diagnostics) system before
taking your vehicle for the inspection.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition key is turned to “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 314
in Section 6.
(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
(h) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
This light reminds you when to replace
the engine oil.
This light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON” and will go off after
about a few seconds.

122

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

When you drive for about 8000 km (5000
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
and then flashes for about 12 seconds
with the ignition key turned to “ON” position. If you continue driving without the
engine oil replacement, and if the driving
range exceeds 12000 km (7500 miles), the
light will come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON” position. The light will remain on thereafter.
If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road condition. If the light comes on, replace it as soon as possible.
You need to reset the light after the engine oil replacement. Reset the light by
following the procedure below:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “OFF” position with the odometer reading shown.
(For details, see “Odometer and two
trip meters” on page 116 in this Section.)
2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position while holding down the trip meter
reset button.

Hold down the button until the light goes
off. Before the light goes off, it illuminates
for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and
illuminates for 1 second.
If the system fails to reset, the light will
remain flashing.
(i) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. If the anti–
lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if either
of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.


 Anti–lock brake system

 Brake assist system

 Traction control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti–lock brake system does not operate,
so that the wheels will lock up during a
sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.


 The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.


 The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

(two–wheel drive models)


 Active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 Vehicle stability control system

 Downhill assist control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 Hill–start assist control system
123

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti–lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

(j) “VSC TRAC” Warning Light
The light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following.


 Vehicle stability control system

 Traction control system

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

(two–wheel drive models)


 Active traction control system


 The warning light does not come on

(four–wheel drive models)

after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 Downhill assist control system


 The warning light remains on after the

(four–wheel drive models)

ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 Hill–start assist control system


 The warning light comes on while driv-

Either of the following conditions may
occur, but do not indicate a malfunction:

The light will come on when the ignition
key turned to “ON”, and will go off after
a few seconds.


 The light may stay on for about 60

It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.

seconds after the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position. It is normal if it
turns off after a while.


 Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
turns off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the
above mentioned systems do not work.
However, as conventional braking operates
when applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the lights. It is normal if they
go out after a few seconds.

ing.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come
on when the “VSC TRAC” warning light
comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch
is not pushed.
(k) Open Door Warning Light
This light remains on until all the side
doors and back door are completely
closed.

There is no problem when the “VSC
TRAC” warning light comes on when the
brake actuator temperature becomes high.

124

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(l) SRS Warning Light
This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
After about 6 seconds, the light will go
off. This means the system of the airbag and front seat belt pretensioner are
operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction somewhere in
the parts monitored by the warning light
system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.

(m) Automatic
Transmission
Temperature Warning Light

Fluid

This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull off the road. Stop
the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in “P”. With the engine idling, wait until the light goes off. If the
light goes off, you may start the vehicle
again. If the light does not go off, call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light (for vehicles sold in
Canada)
The light warns that the windshield washer
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 343 in
Section 7–3.)
(o) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer reminds you to remove the
key when you open the driver’s door with
the ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.

NOTICE
Continued driving with the warning
light on may damage the automatic
transmission.


 The light does not come on when the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position or remains on.


 The light comes on or flashes while
driving.

125

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CHECKING
SERVICE
REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light and low windshield
washer fluid level warning light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the side doors or back
door.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but do
not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on.
The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds:











 Height control indicator lights

 Height control “OFF” indicator light

 Downhill assist control system indicator
light (four–wheel drive models)
The SRS warning light goes off after
about 6 seconds.
There may be the case that the “ABS”
warning light (brake assist system
warning light), “VSC TRAC” warning
light and “TRAC OFF” (two–wheel drive
models) or “VSC OFF” (four–wheel
drive models) indicator light stay on for
about 60 seconds after the ignition key
is turned to the “ON” position. It is
normal if they go out after a while.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

Engine oil replacement reminder light
“ABS” warning light
“VSC TRAC” warning light
“TRAC OFF” indicator light
(two–wheel drive models)


 “VSC OFF” indicator light
(four–wheel drive models)


 Slip indicator light
126

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four–wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downhill assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill–start assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear height control air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128
129
138
145
148
150
152
155
158
163
164

127

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Ignition switch with steering
lock
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories
on.
This is the normal driving position.
It is not a malfunction even if the needle
on the speedometer may move when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position.

NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON”
position if the engine is not running.
The battery will discharge and the
ignition could be damaged.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.

“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when
released.
For starting tips, see page 259 in Section
3.
It is not a malfunction even if the needle
of the tachometer, fuel gauge or engine
coolant temperature gauge returns to the
bottom position when the ignition switch is
turned to the “START” position.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.
You must push in the key to turn it from
“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selector lever must be in the “P” position before pushing the key.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobiliser system is automatically set. (See
“Engine immobiliser system” on page 12
in Section 1–2.)
When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

128

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Automatic transmission (5–speed)
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
(shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Engine braking
(shifting into overdrive not possible)
3, 2: Stronger engine braking
With the brake pedal depressed
(The ignition switch must be in
“ON” position.)

L: Maximum engine braking

Shift normally.

129

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(b) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 260 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.
When the four–wheel drive control switch
knob is in “L4” (low–speed position, center
differential locked), the driving pattern selector setting has no effect on gear shift
timing. (See “Four–wheel drive system
(full–time four–wheel drive models)” on
page 138 in this Section for information of
the four–wheel drive control.)

Always use the “D” position for better fuel
economy and quieter driving. If the engine
coolant temperature is low or when the
four–wheel drive control switch knob is in
“L4” (low–speed position, center differential
locked), the transmission will not shift into
the overdrive gear even in the “D” position. (See “Four–wheel drive system (full–
time four–wheel drive models)” on page
138 in this Section for information of the
four–wheel drive control.)

CAUTION

(c) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:


 Shift into the “4” position. The transmission will downshift to fourth gear
and engine braking will be enabled.


 Shift into the “3” position. The transmission will downshift to third gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.
Two–wheel drive models
133 km/h (83 mph)

2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.

3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.

Four–wheel drive control switch
knob at “H4”
133 km/h (83 mph)

If the automatic locking operation linked
with the shift position is set, all the side
doors and back door are automatically
locked when the shift lever is moved out
of the “P” position with the engine running
(including ignition switch in the “ON” position) and all the side doors and back door
are closed. For details, see “—Automatic
door locking and unlocking functions” on
page 17 in Section 1–2.

Four–wheel drive control switch
knob at “L4”
52 km/h (32 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

130

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Shift into the “2” position. The trans-


 Shift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.

mission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.

Two–wheel drive models
90 km/h (56 mph)

Two–wheel drive models
47 km/h (29 mph)

Four–wheel drive models

Four–wheel drive models

Four–wheel drive control switch
knob at “H4”
90 km/h (56 mph)

Four–wheel drive control switch
knob at “H4”
47 km/h (29 mph)

Four–wheel drive control switch
knob at “L4”
35 km/h (22 mph)

Four–wheel drive control switch
knob at “L4”
18 km/h (11 mph)
When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift from “D” to “4”,
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 164 in this
Section.

CAUTION

(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in ”3”, “2” or “L”,
you can start the vehicle in motion as
with the lever in “D”.
With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the
vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to third gear or second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE
 Be careful not to over–rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:

Two–wheel drive models
“3” . . . . . . . 136 km/h (84 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 54 km/h (33 mph)

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to spin or
skid.

131

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Four–wheel drive models
Four–wheel drive
knob at “H4”
“3” . . . . . . . 136
“2” . . . . . . . . 93
“L” . . . . . . . . 54
Four–wheel drive
knob at “L4”
“3” . . . . . . . . 53
“2” . . . . . . . . 36
“L” . . . . . . . . 21

control switch
km/h (84 mph)
km/h (57 mph)
km/h (33 mph)

(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE

control switch
km/h (32 mph)
km/h (22 mph)
km/h (13 mph)

 Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may
cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To
prevent such damage, “4” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.

Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked
with the shift position is set, all the side
doors and back door are automatically unlocked when the selector lever is moved
to the “P” position with the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position. For details, see
“—Automatic door locking and unlocking
functions” on page 17 in Section 1–2.
(g) Good driving practice


 If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between fourth gear and
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever
to the “D” position immediately afterward.


 When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
use “D” position.

CAUTION

CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

132

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 298 in Section 4.

133

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Automatic transmission (4–speed)
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
(shifting into overdrive possible)
3: Engine braking
(shifting into overdrive not possible)
2: Stronger engine braking
With the brake pedal depressed
(The ignition switch must be in
“ON” position.)

L: Maximum engine braking

Shift normally.

134

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(b) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 260 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.
When the multi–mode control switch knob
is in “L4” (low–speed position, four–wheel
drive, center differential locked), the driving pattern selector setting has no effect
on gear shift timing. (See “Four–wheel
drive system (multi–mode four–wheel drive
models)” on page 141 in this Section for
information of the multi–mode control.)
2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel
economy and quieter driving. If the engine
coolant temperature is low or when the
multi–mode control switch knob is in “L4”
(low–speed position, four–wheel drive,
center differential locked), the transmission
will not shift into the overdrive gear even
in the “D” position. (See “Four–wheel drive
system (multi–mode four–wheel drive models)” on page 141 in this Section for information of the multi–mode control.)

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.
If the automatic locking operation linked
with the shift position is set, all the side
doors and back door are automatically
locked when the shift lever is moved out
of the “P” position with the engine running
(including ignition switch in the “ON” position) and all the side doors and back door
are closed. For details, see “—Automatic
door locking and unlocking functions” on
page 17 in Section 1–2.

(c) Using engine braking
To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:


 Shift into the “3” position. The transmission will downshift to third gear.


 Shift into the “2” position. The transmission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.
Two–wheel drive models
123 km/h (76 mph)
Four–wheel drive models
Multi–mode control switch knob at
“H4”
123 km/h (76 mph)
Multi–mode control switch knob at
“L4”
41 km/h (25 mph)

135

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Shift into the “L” position. The transmission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.
Two–wheel drive models
59 km/h (36 mph)
Four–wheel drive models
Multi–mode control switch knob at
“H4”
59 km/h (36 mph)
Multi–mode control switch knob at
“L4”
11 km/h (6 mph)
When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift from “D” to “3”,
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 164 in this
Section.

(d) Using “2” and “L” positions
The “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in “2” or “L”, you
can start the vehicle in motion as with the
lever in “D”.
With the selector lever in “2”, the vehicle
will start in first gear and automatically
shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE
 Be careful not to over–rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:

Four–wheel drive models
Multi–mode control switch knob
at “H2” or “H4”
“2” . . . . . . . 123 km/h (76 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 67 km/h (41 mph)
Multi–mode control switch knob
at “L4”
“2” . . . . . . . . 48 km/h (29 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 26 km/h (16 mph)
 Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“2” or “L” position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent
such damage, “D” or “3” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.

Two–wheel drive models
“2” . . . . . . . 123 km/h (76 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . 67 km/h (41 mph)

CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to spin or
skid.

136

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.

If the automatic unlocking operation linked
with the shift position is set, all the side
doors and back door are automatically unlocked when the selector lever is moved
to the “P” position with the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position. For details, see
“—Automatic door locking and unlocking
functions” on page 17 in Section 1–2.

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

(g) Good driving practice


 If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “3” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever
to the “D” position immediately afterward.


 When towing a trailer, in order to main-

(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 298 in Section 4.

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use “D” position. The selector lever
must be in the “3” position.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

137

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Four–wheel drive system (full–time
four–wheel drive models)—
(a) Four–wheel drive control
Use the four–wheel drive control switch
knob and center differential lock switch
to select the transfer and center differential modes.
The “H4” and “L4” positions of the four–
wheel drive control switch knob provide
either lock or unlock mode of the center
differential depending on the center differential lock switch position.

Four–wheel drive control switch knob

Use the center differential lock system if
your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when
you are driving on a slippery or bumpy
surface. When the center differential is
locked, the vehicle stability control system
is automatically turned off and the center
differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator
lights come on because the function that
controls engine performance interferes
with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE
As soon as the center differential lock
switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”
indicator light comes on. After the
wheels are out of the ditch or off the
slippery or bumpy surface, turn the
center differential lock switch off.
Make sure that the center differential
lock indicator light and vehicle stability control system off indicator light
turn off.
“H4” (high speed position, center differential unlocked): Four–wheel drive control
switch knob at “H4”, center differential
lock switch left out
Use this for normal driving on all types of
roads, from dry hard–surfaced roads to
wet, icy or snow–covered roads. This
position gives greater economy, quietest
ride, least wear and better vehicle control.
“H4” (high speed position, center differential locked): Four–wheel drive control
switch knob at “H4”, center differential
lock switch pushed in

Center differential lock switch

Use this for greater traction when you
experience a loss of power, such as
wheel slipping, in the center differential
unlock mode.

138

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

“L4” (low speed position, center differential unlocked): Four–wheel drive control
switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock
switch left out
The “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)
indicator light comes on when the “L4”
mode is selected.
Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use this for climbing or descending steep
hills, off–road driving, and hard pulling in
sand or mud.
In this mode, the braking feeling that occurs when the wheels are negotiating a
sharp corner is further reduced than in the
“L4” (low position, center differential
locked) mode.
“L4” (low speed position, center differential locked): Four–wheel drive control
switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock
switch pushed in
The “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)
indicator light comes on when the “L4”
mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use this for hard pulling in situations the
vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”
(low speed position, center differential unlocked) mode. Also, using this mode when
driving down steep off–road inclines will
help contribute to increased vehicle stability.
The indicator light tells when the differential lock is engaged. Note that the differential is not still locked as long as the
indicator light remains off.
When the operation is not completed, the
indicator blinks. If the indicator light does
not go off when you push out the center
differential lock switch, drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating,
or drive in reverse.
If the center differential lock system operation is not completed within 5 seconds
while the cruise control system is set,
cancel the cruise control system. To cancel the cruise control system, see “Cruise
control” on page 164 in Section 1–6.
If the indicator blinks even if doing so,
contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. There may be a trouble in the
center differential lock system.
See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further instructions.

Advice for driving on slippery roads in
“L4” (low speed position) mode
If the four–wheel drive control switch knob
is in the “L4” and the automatic transmission selector lever is in the “2” or “3”
when you drive in steep off–road areas,
the output of the brake can be controlled
effectively by the active traction control
system, which assists the driver to control
the driving power of 4 wheels.
Use the “L” position of the automatic
transmission selector lever for maximum
power and traction when your wheels get
stuck or when you drive down a steep
incline. In the following cases, the output
of the brake can be controlled by the
active traction control system if the engine
speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine
speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels
get unstuck).


 The four–wheel drive control switch
knob in the “L4” position and the automatic transmission selector lever in the
“L” position


 The four–wheel drive control switch
knob in the “L4” position and the automatic transmission selector lever in the
“D”, “4”, “3” or “2” with the transmission downshifting to first gear

139

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(b) Shifting procedure

 The four–wheel drive control switch
knob in the “L4” position and the automatic transmission selector lever in the
“R” position
(As for the automatic transmission selector lever positions, see “Automatic transmission (5–speed)” on page 129 in this
Section.)

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)
AND “H4” (LOCKED)
To shift between unlock and lock
modes in “H4”, push the center differential lock switch.
SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)
AND “L4” (LOCKED)
To shift between unlock and lock
modes in “L4”, push the center differential lock switch.
SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”
To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop with the brake
pedal held down with your foot, shift the
automatic transmission selector lever into
“N” and push and turn the four–wheel
drive control switch knob fully clockwise.
To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop with the brake
pedal held down with your foot, shift the
automatic transmission selector lever into
“N” and turn the four–wheel drive control
switch knob fully counterclockwise.

If the “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)
indicator light continues to blink when you
operate the four–wheel drive control
switch knob to the “H4” or “L4” position,
drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely,
shift the automatic transmission selector
lever securely into “N” and operate the
switch knob again.
If the indicator continues to blink even if
doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible. There may be a trouble
in the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION
Never operate the four–wheel drive
control switch knob if the wheels are
slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before operating.

140

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Four–wheel drive system
(multi–mode four–wheel drive
models)—
(a) Multi–mode control
Use the center differential lock system if
your wheels get stuck in a ditch, or when
you are driving on a slippery or bumpy
surface. When the center differential is
locked, the vehicle stability control system
is automatically turned off and the center
differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator
lights come on because the function that
controls engine performance interferes
with the process of freeing your wheels.

NOTICE
Center differential lock switch

Use the multi–mode control switch
knob and center differential lock switch
to select the transfer and center differential modes.
The “H4” and “L4” positions of the multi–
mode control switch knob provide either
lock or unlock mode of the center differential depending on the center differential
lock switch position.

As soon as the center differential lock
switch is turned on, the “VSC OFF”
indicator light comes on. After the
wheels are out of the ditch or off the
slippery or bumpy surface, turn the
center differential lock switch off.
Make sure that the center differential
lock indicator light and vehicle stability control system off indicator light
turn off.

Multi–mode control switch knob

141

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

“H2” (high speed position, two–wheel
drive, center differential unlocked): Multi–mode control switch knob at “H2”, center differential lock switch left out

“L4” (low speed position, four–wheel
drive, center differential unlocked): Multi–mode control switch knob at “L4”, center differential lock switch left out

Use this for normal driving on dry hard–
surfaced roads. This position gives greater
economy, quietest ride, least wear and
better vehicle control.

The four–wheel drive and “4LO” (low
speed four–wheel drive) indicator lights
come on when the “L4” mode is selected.

“H4” (high speed position, four–wheel
drive, center differential unlocked): Multi–mode control switch knob at “H4”, center differential lock switch left out
The four–wheel drive indicator light comes
on when the “H4” mode is selected.
Use this for normal driving on all types of
roads, from dry hard–surfaced roads to
wet, icy or snow–covered roads. This
position provides greater traction than
two–wheel drive.
“H4” (high speed position, four–wheel
drive, center differential locked): Multi–
mode control switch knob at “H4”, center
differential lock switch pushed in
The four–wheel drive indicator light comes
on when the “H4” mode is selected.
Use this for greater traction when you
experience a loss of power, such as
wheel slipping, in the center differential
unlock mode.

Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use this for climbing or descending steep
hills, off–road driving, and hard pulling in
sand or mud.
In this mode, the braking feeling that occurs when the wheels are negotiating a
sharp corner is further reduced than in the
“L4” (low speed position, four–wheel drive,
center differential locked) mode.
“L4” (low speed position, four–wheel
drive, center differential locked): Multi–
mode control switch knob at “L4”, center
differential lock switch pushed in
The four–wheel drive and “4LO” (low
speed four–wheel drive) indicator lights
come on when the “L4” mode is selected.

Use this for maximum power and traction.
Use this for hard pulling in situations the
vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L4”
(low speed position, four–wheel drive, center differential unlocked) mode. Also, using
this mode when driving down steep off–
road inclines will help contribute to increased vehicle stability.
The indicator light tells when the differential lock is engaged. Note that the differential is not still locked as long as the
indicator light remains off.
When the operation is not completed, the
indicator blinks. If the indicator light does
not go off when you push out the center
differential lock switch, drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating,
or drive in reverse.
If the center differential lock system operation is not completed within 5 seconds
while the cruise control system is set,
cancel the cruise control system. To cancel the cruise control system, see “Cruise
control” on page 164 in Section 1–6.
If the indicator blinks even if doing so,
contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. There may be a trouble in the
center differential lock system.
See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further instructions.

142

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(b) A.D.D.
(automatic disconnecting
differential)
Advice for driving on slippery roads in
“L4” (low speed position) mode
If the multi–mode control switch knob is
in the “L4” and the automatic transmission
selector lever is in the “2” when you drive
in steep off–road areas, the output of the
brake can be controlled effectively by the
active traction control system, which assists the driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.


 The multi–mode control switch knob in
the “L4” position and the automatic
transmission selector lever in the “R”
position
(As for the automatic transmission selector lever positions, see “Automatic transmission (4–speed)” on page 134 in this
Section.)

The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations described in “(c) Shifting procedure”.
You should drive in four–wheel drive for
at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.

Use the “L” position of the automatic
transmission selector lever for maximum
power and traction when your wheels get
stuck or when you drive down a steep
incline. In the following cases, the output
of the brake can be controlled by the
active traction control system if the engine
speed is under 3000 rpm (normally engine
speed is under 3000 rpm when the wheels
get unstuck).


 The multi–mode control switch knob in
the “L4” position and the automatic
transmission selector lever in the “L”
position


 The multi–mode control switch knob in
the “L4” position and the automatic
transmission selector lever in the “D”,
“3” or “2” with the transmission downshifting to first gear

143

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(c) Shifting procedure
SHIFTING BETWEEN “H2”
(UNLOCKED)

AND “H4”

To shift from “H2” to “H4” (unlocked),
reduce the vehicle speed to less than 100
km/h (62 mph) and turn the multi–mode
control switch knob fully clockwise.
If the four–wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when you operate the multi–mode control switch knob from the “H2”
to the “H4” position, this reminds you that
the transfer mode is not securely in “H4”
mode. Drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating.
If the four–wheel drive indicator light continues to blink and the buzzer sounds
when you operate the multi–mode control
switch knob from the “H2” to the “H4”
position, this reminds you that the transfer
mode is not in “H4” mode. Stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less
than 100 km/h (62 mph). Operate the
switch knob again.

To shift from “H4” (unlocked) to “H2”,
turn the multi–mode control switch knob
fully counterclockwise.
This can be done at any speed.
If the four–wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when you operate the multi–mode control switch knob from the “H4”
to the “H2” position, this reminds you that
the transfer mode is not securely in “H2”
mode. Drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or
backward in a short distance.
If the indicator light continues to blink
even if doing so, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. There may be
a trouble in the four–wheel drive system.

CAUTION
Never operate the multi–mode control
switch knob if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning
before operating.

SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” (UNLOCKED)
AND “H4” (LOCKED)
To shift between unlock and lock
modes in “H4”, push the center differential lock switch.
SHIFTING BETWEEN “L4” (UNLOCKED)
AND “L4” (LOCKED)
To shift between unlock and lock
modes in “L4”, push the center differential lock switch.
SHIFTING BETWEEN “H4” AND “L4”
To shift from “H4” to “L4”, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop with the brake
pedal held down with your foot, shift the
automatic transmission selector lever into
“N” and push and turn the multi–mode
control switch knob fully clockwise.
To shift from “L4” to “H4”, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop with the brake
pedal held down with your foot, shift the
automatic transmission selector lever into
“N” and turn the multi–mode control switch
knob counterclockwise.

144

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Traction control system
(two–wheel drive models)
If the “4LO” (low speed four–wheel drive)
indicator light continues to blink when you
operate the multi–mode control switch
knob to the “H4” or “L4” position, drive
forward or backward in a short distance,
then stop the vehicle completely, shift the
automatic transmission selector lever securely into “N” and operate the switch
knob again.

The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of rear
wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

If the indicator continues to blink even if
doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible. There may be a trouble
in the four–wheel drive system.

Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the rear wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction
control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which may
cause the vehicle to lose traction
control. In situations where the road
surface is covered with ice or snow,
your vehicle should be fitted with
snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious
speed for the present road conditions.

CAUTION
Never operate the multi–mode control
switch knob if the wheels are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning
before operating.

When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION

NORMAL DRIVING MODE
Leave the system on during ordinary
driving so that it can operate when
needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self–check
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:


 The system controls the spinning of the
rear wheels. At this time, the slip indicator light blinks.

145

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 You may feel vibration or noise in your

To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch
once again.

vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.

The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.
The traction control system will automatically go on, and the “TRAC OFF” indicator
light will go off when you drive over 30
km/h (19 mph) even if the “TRAC OFF”
switch is pushed to cancel the traction
control system.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.

“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on for
a few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to “ON”. It will come on again
when you push the “TRAC OFF” switch to
turn off the system.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE
If your wheels get stuck in an ditch
when you are driving on a severe off
road and sand, turn off the traction
control system. This system that controls engine performance may interfere
with the process of freeing your
wheels.

The light may come on for 60 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It
is normal if they go out after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the “TRAC OFF” indicator
light. It is normal if it goes out after a few
seconds.

To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come
on.
The vehicle stability control system is always activated, even if the traction control
system is turned off.

146

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
goes out after a few seconds.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:


 The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition key
“ON”.

is

turned to

The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the above
mentioned systems such as on slippery
roads. If the brake actuator temperature
becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to
sound intermittently to indicate that the
traction control system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place.


 The indicator light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The indicator light comes on with the
normal driving mode while driving.

“VSC TRAC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following.


 Traction control system

 Vehicle stability control system

 Hill–start assist control system
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the warning
light will come on and will go off after a
few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.)
At the time the “VSC TRAC” warning light
will come on and the traction control system temporarily stops operating in order to
protect the brake actuator. (Although the
traction control system does not operate,
there is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be automatically restored after a short time and the “VSC
TRAC” warning light goes out.

147

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models)
If the light comes on while driving, the
traction control system does not work.
However, as normal braking operates
when being applied, there is no problem
to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:


 The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light comes on while driving.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come
on when the “VSC TRAC” warning light
comes on even if the “TRAC OFF” switch
is not pushed.

The active traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of
4 wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”,
the system automatically turns on.

CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the 4 wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction
control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which may
cause the vehicle to lose traction
control. In situations where the road
surface is covered with ice or snow,
your vehicle should be fitted with
snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious
speed for the present road conditions.

Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it can operate
when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the active traction control system is in the self–
check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
When the active traction control system is
operating, the following conditions occur:


 The system controls the spinning of the
4 wheels. At this time, the slip indicator light blinks.

148

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 You may feel vibration or noise in your

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
goes out after a few seconds.

vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.

The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the above
mentioned systems such as on slippery
roads. If the brake actuator temperature
becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to
sound intermittently to indicate that the
active traction control system can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop
your vehicle at a safe place.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.

“VSC TRAC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following.










Active traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
Downhill assist control system
Hill–start assist control system

When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the warning
light will come on and will go off after a
few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.

If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.)
At the time, the “VSC TRAC” warning light
will come on and the active traction control system temporarily stops operating in
order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the active traction control system
does not operate, there is no problem to
continue your driving.) The system will be
automatically restored after a short time
and the “VSC TRAC” warning light goes
out.

149

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Vehicle stability control
system
If the light comes on while driving, the
active traction control system does not
work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:


 The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light comes on while driving.

The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
systems such as anti–lock brake system, traction control, engine control,
etc. This system automatically controls
the output of the brakes or engine to
help prevent the vehicle from skidding
when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly.
The vehicle stability control activates
when the vehicle speed is more than 15
km/h (9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self–check mode, but does
not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION


 Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability control system. Even
if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always
drive carefully and attentively to
avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light
blinks and an alarm sounds, special
care should be taken while driving.


 Only use tires of specified size. The
size, manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, or different type or
size, the vehicle stability control
system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 333 in Section 7–2.)

150

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:


 The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition key
“ON”.

is

turned to


 The indicator light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The indicator light comes on when the
system is on while driving.

NOTICE

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.

Make sure that the center differential
lock indicator light goes off before
normal driving.

Four–wheel drive models only—
Pushing the center differential lock
switch automatically turns the vehicle
stability control system off. At this
time, the “VSC OFF” indicator comes
on with the center differential lock indicator light.
“VSC OFF” indicator light comes on for a
few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to “ON”. It will come on again
when you push the center differential lock
switch to turn off the system.

151

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Downhill assist control system
(four–wheel drive models)
The light may come on for 60 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It
is normal if they go out after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if they
go out after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
vehicle stability control system does not
work. However, as normal braking operates when being applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
“VSC TRAC” warning light
This light warns that when there is a
problem somewhere in the following.


 Vehicle stability control system

 Traction control system
(two–wheel drive models)


 Active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 Downhill assist control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light comes on while driving.
Two–wheel drive models only—The “TRAC
OFF” indicator light will come on when the
“VSC TRAC” warning light comes on even
if the “TRAC OFF” switch is not pushed.

The downhill assist control system is a
system that assists the deceleration of
the engine brake when you drive down
a steep hill. When you are driving down
a hill with the four–wheel drive control
switch knob (full–time four–wheel drive
models) or multi–mode control switch
knob (multi–mode four–wheel drive
models) in the “L4” position, push the
“DAC” switch to limit the vehicle’s acceleration. If the vehicle is traveling at
a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less,
you can descend at a constant speed.

CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the downhill assist control system. It may not
be able to maintain a low speed over
road surfaces or off–road surfaces on
which sliding can easily occur, such
as extremely steep slopes or icy or
muddy roads.


 Hill–start assist control system
The light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to “ON”, and will go off after
about a few seconds.

152

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST
CONTROL SYSTEM

If the indicator light does not come on
when the switch is pushed, contact your
Toyota dealer.

1. Full–time four–wheel drive models—
Turn the four–wheel drive control
switch knob to the “L4” position.
The system will not operate if the four–
wheel drive control switch knob is in the
“H4” position.
Multi–mode four–wheel drive models—Turn the multi–mode control
switch knob to the “L4” position.
The system will not operate if the multi–
mode control switch knob is in the “H4”
position.
2. In order to make full use of the engine brake, putting the transmission
in “L” or “2” is recommended.
5–speed automatic transmission—The system will operate even if the transmission
selector lever is in “D”, “4”, “3” or “N”.
However, when it is in “L” or “2” the engine brake can also be utilized enabling
the system to operate more effectively.
4–speed automatic transmission—The system will operate even if the transmission
selector lever is in “D”, “3” or “N”. However, when it is in “L” or “2” the engine
brake can also be utilized enabling the
system to operate more effectively.

3. Push the “DAC” switch to turn the
system on. The downhill assist control system indicator light on the instrument panel will come on.
Full–time four–wheel drive models—If the
downhill assist control system indicator
light flashes, the selector lever may be in
“N” or the four–wheel drive control switch
knob may be in the “H4” position.
If the indicator light does not come on
when the switch is pushed, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Multi–mode four–wheel drive models—If
the downhill assist control system indicator light flashes, the selector lever may be
in “N” or the multi–mode control switch
knob may be in the “H2” or “H4” position.

153

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The slip indicator light and downhill assist
control system indicator light come on for
a few seconds when the ignition key is
turned to “ON”. If any of the indicator
lights does not come on when the ignition
is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.
If the system is used frequently, the
brake actuator temperature may become
too high and a buzzer will sound intermittently.

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of
25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release your
foot from the accelerator or brake pedal
to activate the system. The vehicle will
descend the hill at a low speed. While the
system is operating, the slip indicator light
on the instrument panel will flash and the
stop lights and high mounted stoplight will
be lit.
If you push the “DAC” switch to turn the
system off while it is in operation, the
system will stop operating gradually. The
downhill assist control system indicator
light will flash to alert the driver. To continue driving at a low speed, push the
“DAC” switch to turn the system on.

If this happens, the downhill assist control
system indicator light will flash and a
buzzer will sound intermittently. When the
temperature of the brake actuator goes
down, the system will begin to operate
again. Until it restarts, the active traction
control system and hill–start assist control
system will not operate; however, the conventional brake can be operated.

If there is any abnormality in the system, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will
come on. When the “DAC” switch is
pushed, the downhill assist control system indicator light also flash.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes
on, there may be an abnormality in any
of the following systems in addition to the
downhill assist control system.


 Hill–start assist control system

 Active traction control system

 Vehicle stability control system

154

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Hill–start assist control
system
“VSC TRAC” warning light
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the warning
light will come on and will go off after a
few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
goes out after a few seconds.
The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the above
mentioned system on such as slippery
roads. If the brake actuator temperature
becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to
sound intermittently to indicate that the
downhill assist control system can no longer operate. In this case, stop your vehicle immediately at a safe place.
If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the “VSC TRAC” warning
light will come on and the downhill assist
control system stops operating temporarily
in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the downhill assist control system
does not operate, it is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be
automatically restored after a short time
and the “VSC TRAC” warning light goes
out.
If the warning light comes on while driving, the system does not work. However,
as normal braking operates when being
applied, it is no problem to continue your
driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:


 The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light comes on while driv-

The hill–start assist control system assists you in starting to move up a
steep or slippery hill. When you start
to move up the hill slope, the system
helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the interval while you
move your foot from the brake pedal to
the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION


 Do not rely excessively on the hill–
start assist control system. The vehicle may not be able to start
smoothly on road surfaces or off–
road surfaces such as extremely
steep slopes or icy roads, on which
sliding can occur very easily.


 Do not use the hill–start assist control system to stop the vehicle. This
system is not designed as a function for stopping the vehicle on a
uphill slope.

ing.

155

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The hill–start assist control system will
operate for 5 seconds maximally when
all of the following conditions apply.

Keep in mind the following when driving.


 The hill–start assist control system op-


 5–speed

erates for 5 seconds maximally. If both
the brake and accelerator pedals remain undepressed for longer than 5
seconds, the buzzer will sound at more
frequent intervals and the system will
gradually stop operating.

automatic transmission—
When the transmission is in any of
positions “D”, “4”, “3”, “2” or “L”
4–speed automatic transmission—
When the transmission is in any of
positions “D”, “3”, “2” or “L”


 The hill–start assist control system is


 When the brake pedal is not depressed
The system is designed to operate when
the vehicle is starting on an uphill slope;
therefore, if the transmission is in “P” or
“N” it will not operate. It will not operate
either if the vehicle starts to move in
reverse on a slope with the transmission
in the “R”.

When the hill–start assist control system
is operating, the slip indicator light flashes
and an alarm sounds intermittently. At the
same time, the stop lamps and high
mounted stoplight are lit.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition key is turned
to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on,
contact your Toyota dealer.

not designed as a function for stopping
the vehicle on a uphill slope. When
stopping the vehicle, be sure to depress the brake pedal.
If the system is used frequently, the
brake actuator temperature may become
too high and a buzzer will sound intermittently.
In this case, a buzzer will sound intermittently. When the temperature of the brake
actuator goes down, the system will begin
to operate again. Until it restarts, the traction control system (two–wheel drive models), active traction control system (four–
wheel drive models) and downhill assist
control system will not operate; however,
the conventional brake can be operated.

156

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

“VSC TRAC” warning light
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the warning
light will come on and will go off after a
few seconds.
It is not a malfunction that the warning
light may stay on for 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly
may turn on the light. It is normal if it
goes out after a few seconds.

If there is any abnormality in the system, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will
come on.
If the system malfunctions, the
TRAC” warning light will come on.

“VSC

If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes
on, there may be an abnormality in any
of the following systems in addition to the
hill–start assist control system.


 Downhill assist control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 Traction control system

The brake actuator temperature increases
during continuous operation of the above
mentioned system on such as slippery
roads. If the brake actuator temperature
becomes too high while any of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to
sound intermittently to indicate that the
hill–start assist control system can no longer operate. In this case, stop your vehicle immediately at a safe place.
If the system continues to operate, the
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to
continuous.
(The
continuous
buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.)

At this time, the “VSC TRAC” warning
light will come on and the hill–start assist
control system stops operating temporarily
in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although the hill–start assist control system
does not operate, it is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be
automatically restored after a short time
and the “VSC TRAC” warning light goes
out.
If the warning light comes on while driving, the system does not work. However,
as normal braking operates when being
applied, it is no problem to continue your
driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:


 The warning light does not come on
after the ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light remains on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON”.


 The warning light comes on while driving.

(two–wheel drive models)


 Active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models)


 Vehicle stability control system
157

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Rear height control air
suspension
“HI” (high) mode—

“LO” (low) mode—

The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 in.)
higher at rear than the “N” mode height.

The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8 in.)
lower at rear than the “N” mode height.

This mode is suitable when driving on the
bumpy roads and through water.

This mode allows you easy access to the
vehicle (getting in and out) and easy loading and unloading operation.

However, when the vehicle speed exceeds
about 30 km/h (19 mph) or over in the
“HI” mode, the “N” mode is automatically
selected.

This mode is available when the vehicle
speed is under about 12 km/h (7 mph).

NOTICE
CAUTION
This rear height control air suspension
controls the vehicle height depending
on the vehicle driving conditions. Select
your desired height among the “HI”
(high), “N” (normal) and “LO” (low)
modes with the height select switch.
(a) Vehicle height modes
“N” (normal) mode—
The vehicle height in this mode is standard.
Regardless of the number of occupants or the
luggage loading condition, the vehicle height
is always automatically adjusted to a fixed
height in this mode while the engine is
running.

The “HI” mode should be used for
severe off–road driving condition
only. Because the vehicle’s center of
gravity is higher in this setting, the
vehicle may become unstable when
turning abruptly, resulting in accident.

Use the “LO” mode when the vehicle
is stopped. Otherwise, when the vehicle speed exceeds about 12 km/h (7
mph), “N” mode is selected automatically. So be careful when you drive in
any place where the overhead height
is limited.
(b) Vehicle height mode changing condition
To change the vehicle height, it is necessary
to meet the following conditions.


 The engine should be running.

 The height control “OFF” indicator light
should go off.

This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

158

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 When selecting a mode, there is a vehicle speed limit. Refer to the following
table.
Yes = The mode can be selected.
No = The mode cannot be selected.
“LO”
mode

“N”
mode

“HI”
mode

Under about
12 km/h
(7 mph)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Under about
30 km/h
(19 mph)

No

Yes

Yes

About
30 km/h
(19 mph) or
over

No

If the vehicle is moved to its usual location or the ice is removed and the height
select switch is pressed, the vehicle
height control cannot be operated. In this
case, turn off and restart the engine, then
push the control switches.

(c) Vehicle height adjustment
Yes

No

To change the mode, push the height
select switch on either side of “
”
(higher) or “” (lower).

In the following cases, the rear height
control suspension will not operate.

The height control indicator light indicates
which mode is selected. (See “(e) Height
control indicator light” described below.)


 The underbody of the vehicle has

Selecting the “HI” mode—

touched the surface on bumpy roads.


 The area around the rear suspension
is coated with ice.

Push the height select switch on the “
”
side when the vehicle speed is under
about 30 km/h (19 mph).
To change the “N” mode to “HI”, push
the switch once.

159

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

To change the “LO” mode to “HI”, push
the switch twice. It takes about 30 seconds until the “LO” mode changes to the
“HI” mode.
Selecting the “N” mode—
To change the “HI” mode to “N”, push
the height select switch on the “” side
once.
To change the “LO” mode to “N”, push
the height select switch on the “
” side
once.
Selecting the “LO” mode—
Push the height select switch on the “”
side while the vehicle is stopped.
To change the “N” mode to “LO”, push
the switch once.
To change the “HI” mode to “LO”, push
the switch twice.
Even if the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being lowered, the operation
continues for up to 25 seconds. If, within
this 25 seconds, any of the side doors or the
back door is opened, operation will continue
for a further 15 seconds.

NOTICE
 If the vehicle height is changed frequently when the vehicle is heavily
loaded, the compressor may overheat, causing the vehicle height adjustment operation to stop.
 Before you lower the vehicle height
with the height select switch, check
under the vehicle to make sure
nothing to damage the vehicle or
no one to be injured is there and
that the underbody of the vehicle
does not touch the ground.
 After unloading, the height of a vehicle equipped with the rear height
control air suspension becomes
slightly higher than the normal vehicle height. Take sufficient care
where the overhead height is restricted.
 Do not select the “LO” mode in the
bumpy roads. If the underbody of
the vehicle touches the rugged road
surface, the vehicle may be damaged.

160

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(d) Turning off the rear height control
air suspension
To turn off the rear height control air
suspension with the vehicle stopped,
push the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF”
switch. The height control “OFF” indicator light comes on and the vehicle
height is fixed in the same mode as the
height control switch is pushed.

CAUTION
If you drive through deep water over
about 700 mm (28 in.) in depth, put
the vehicle height in the “HI” mode
with the height select switch and then
turn off the rear height control air
suspension by pushing the “HEIGHT
CONTROL OFF” switch.

 If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off
the rear height control air suspension with the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch. Otherwise, the vehicle
height may change because of the
automatic leveling function resulting
in an unexpected accident.

This status is memorized in the system
even after the engine is stopped.
If you push the switch again, the height
control “OFF” indicator light goes out and
the rear height control air suspension is
turned on.
Even after the rear height control air suspension is turned off with the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch, if the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the rear height
control air suspension automatically selects
the “N” mode.

NOTICE
 When jacking up or installing tire
chains, be sure to turn off the rear
height control air suspension by
pushing the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch and stop the engine.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change because of the automatic
leveling function, resulting in an unexpected accident.
 If your vehicle must be towed, put
the vehicle height in the “N” mode
and turn off the rear height control
air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of
the automatic leveling function, resulting in an unexpected accident.

161

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1. The present mode indicator light goes
off and the selected mode indicator
light blinks.
2. The selected mode indicator light goes
off. (The vehicle height does not
change.) The present mode indicator
light comes on again.
In this case, even if the vehicle is moved
to its usual location or the ice is removed
and the height select switch is pressed,
vehicle height control cannot be operated.
Turn off the engine once and then restart
it.
(e) Height control indicator lights
1. Height control indicator lights
2. Height control “OFF” indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned on, all the
indicator lights come on. The indicator light
showing the present mode only remains on
and all other lights go off after a few seconds. This means the system operates correctly.

If you change the vehicle height mode,
the indicator lights change as follows:
When changing the vehicle height from
the “N” mode to “HI”:
1. The “N” mode indicator light goes off
and the “HI” mode indicator light blinks.
2. After the vehicle height control reaches
the “HI” mode, the “HI” mode indicator
light remains on.
If the underbody of the vehicle has
touched the surface on bumpy roads or
the area around the rear suspension is
coated with ice, the vehicle height cannot
be lowered with the height select switch.
The height control indicator lights change
as follows:

Height control “OFF” indicator light:
When the ignition switch is turned on, this
light comes on. If it goes out after a few
seconds, the rear height control air suspension operates correctly. If you push the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch, the rear
height control air suspension is turned off.
The height control “OFF” indicator light
comes on.
In the following cases, there is a problem
somewhere in the rear height control air
suspension. Although there is no problem
to continue normal driving, have the rear
height control air suspension checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

162

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Parking brake

 The height control “OFF” indicator light
does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned on.


 The height control “OFF” indicator light
blinks.
(f) Parking and stopping tips
If you immediately stop the engine to park
the vehicle after off–road driving, the vehicle height is lowered slightly as the vehicle becomes cool. When parking, make
sure there is nothing that will be in contact with the underbody of the vehicle.
When you start the engine, the vehicle
returns to the previous height.
If you park the vehicle for a long time,
the vehicle height may be gradually lowered. When parking for a long time, make
sure there is nothing that will be in contact with the underbody of the vehicle.
When you start the engine, the vehicle
returns to the previous height.
If you stop the engine, the vehicle height
may change in accordance with the
change in the temperature. When you
start the engine, the vehicle returns to the
previous height.

(g) Rear height control failure warning
If there is a problem somewhere in the
rear height control air suspension, the “N”
mode is automatically selected. If this occurs, the height control “OFF” indicator
light blinks and the vehicle height control
cannot be activated until the malfunction
is corrected. If this is the case, bring your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible and have it checked.

When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
To set: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while
setting the parking brake.
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal once again.
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

163

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Cruise control
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control allows you to cruise
the vehicle at a desired speed over 40
km/h (25 mph) even with your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades within the limits of engine
performance, although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or
down the grades. On steeper hills, a
greater speed change will occur so it is
better to drive without the cruise control.

CAUTION


 To help maintain maximum control
of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow–covered) or
winding roads.


 Avoid vehicle speed increases when
driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
To operate the cruise control, press the
“ON–OFF” button. This turns the system
on. The indicator light in the instrument
panel shows that you can now set the
vehicle at a desired cruising speed. Another press will turn the system completely
off.

CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the “ON–OFF” button
off when not using the cruise control.

164

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

CANCELLING THE PRESET SPEED

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “– SET” direction.

You can cancel the preset speed by:
a. Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” direction and releasing it.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
SETTING AT A DESIRED SPEED
The transmission must be in “D” before
you set the cruise control speed.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.

If the vehicle speed falls below about 40
km/h (25 mph), the preset speed will automatically cancel out.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the preset speed, the preset
speed will also automatically cancel out.
If the preset speed automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
Push the lever down in the “– SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “– SET” direction.
Even if you downshift from “D” to “4”
(5–speed automatic transmission) or “3”
(4–speed automatic transmission), with the
cruise control on, engine braking will not
be enabled because the cruise control is
not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle
speed, reset to a slower speed with the
cruise control lever or depress the brake
pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise
control is cancelled.

165

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

RESUMING THE PRESET SPEED
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling
the control lever or by depressing the
brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the
“+ RES” direction will restore the speed
set prior to cancellation.
However, once the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
speed will not be resumed.
CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes when using the
cruise control, press the “ON–OFF” button
to turn the system off and then press it
again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.


 The indicator light does not come on.

 The indicator light flashes again.

 The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

166

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Car audio system
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Car audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

168
168
185
187
195

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

167

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Using your audio system—
—Some basics

Reference

This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your system.
Your audio system works when the ignition
key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off.

Type 1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player (with compact disc
changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/compact disc player with changer

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or
“LOAD” to turn on that function without
pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cassette or compact disc player, a cassette
or compact disc must be loaded in the
player.
You can turn on each player by inserting
a cassette tape or compact disc.
You can turn off each player by ejecting
the cassette tape or compact disc. If the
audio system was previously off, then the
entire audio system will be turned off
when you eject the cassette tape or compact disc. If the another function was previously playing, it will come on again.
SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or
“LOAD” if the system is already on but
you want to switch from one function to
another.

168

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TONE AND BALANCE

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.

Your vehicle has an antenna printed on
the inside of the rear quarter window.

When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. (The player will
automatically eject a disc if the label side
is down.) The player will play from track
1 through the end of the disc. Then it will
play from track 1 again.

Tone
How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange and bass levels. In
fact, different kinds of music and vocal
programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, midrange and bass.
Balance
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

NOTICE
Attaching the film (especially conductive or metallic type) on the rear
quarter glass will noticeably reduce
the sensitivity of the radio.
YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
When you insert a cassette, the exposed
tape should face to the right.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the player and
do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the slot, or the tape
player may be damaged.

169

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 2)
When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
button and gently push the disc in with
the label side up. (The player will automatically eject a disc if the label side is
down.) This compact disc player can store
up to six discs. The player will play from
track 1 through the end of the disc. Then
it will play from track 1 of the next disc.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE
 Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc player. Insert only
one compact disc into slot at a
time.
 Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything except a compact disc into the slot.

170

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Controls and features

Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

171

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the button
until you hear a beep—this will set the
station to the button. The button number
will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on
the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM” or “FM” button.)
(Eject button)
Push the cassette tape eject button to
eject a cassette. Push the compact disc
eject button to eject a compact disc.

Compact disc player

(Program)
Push “
” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).

” (preset button 6) or
Push and hold “
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

AM

(Reverse/Fast forward button)
Cassette player
Push “
” (preset button 6) to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.
To stop the tape while it is fast forward” or “TAPE” button. To stop
ing, push “
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto–reverse feature.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob,
you can adjust the tone and sound balance. On some models, you can also turn
on or off the surround function.
Each time you push this knob, the mode
changes. To adjust the tone and balance
and turn on or off the surround function,
turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The display ranges from –5 to 5.
MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The display ranges from –5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The display ranges from –5 to 5.

172

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround
function.
“SURROUND
ON”
or
“SURROUND OFF” will appear on the
display.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over–current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to record the tape.
∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

FM

 DISC 


Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”
will appear on the display. This system
allows you to set twelve FM stations, two
for each of the preset button.

When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.

With compact disc changer only—

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Use these buttons to select the disc you
want to listen to.

Error messages

Push “” (preset button 3) or “
” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc.

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following
error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up–side
down). Clean the disc and re–insert it.

If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Dolby

B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,
push “ ” (preset button 3). “
” will
appear on the display. Push the button
again to turn off Dolby B NR.

RAND (Random)
There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.

173

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
With compact disc changer only—
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.
RPT (Repeat)
Cassette player
Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the

Compact disc player

SCAN

There are two repeat features—You can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

Radio

Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
With compact disc changer only—
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the top track of
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

” will appear on
track is playing. “
the display. When the track ends, it will
automatically rewind and replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.

174

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Compact disc player

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Radio

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player scanned all the tracks on the disc,
it will stop scanning.

To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.

Push “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.

Cassette Player

ST (Stereo reception) display

Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.

With compact disc changer only—

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the display and the player will scan the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When a beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.

TAPE
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape.

In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.

175

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TEXT
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.
TUNE (Tuning)
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

176

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

177

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE” or
“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the button
until you hear a beep—this will set the
station to the button. The preset button
number will appear on the display.
RDS stations will be preset to the buttons
when you turn on the RDS. (See “RDS”
button.)
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM, two FM and
RDS stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM
TYPE” when you push “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Program)

(Eject button)
Cassette player
This button is used to eject a cassette.
Compact disc player
This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.
To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.

Push “
” (preset button 4) to select
the other side of a cassette tape. The
display indicates which side is currently
selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”
indicates the bottom side).
Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset
button 3) or “
” (preset button 4) until the
number of the disc you want to eject is
displayed. Push and release the eject button.

Cassette player

To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.

Push “
” (preset button 6) to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on
the display. Push “
” (preset button 5)
to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear on
the display.

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

To stop the tape while it is fast forward” or “TAPE” button. To stop
ing, push “
the tape while it is rewinding, push “
”
or “TAPE” button.
If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto–reverse feature.

178

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Compact disc player
” (preset button 6) or
Push and hold “
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
By using the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob,
you can adjust the tone and sound balance, and turn on or off the surround
function.
Each time you push this knob, the mode
changes. To adjust the tone and balance
and turn on or off the surround function,
turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones. The display ranges from –5 to 5.
MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones. The display ranges from –5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones. The display ranges from –5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

“ERROR 4”: Over–current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

SURROUND: Turn on or off the surround
function. “SURROUND ON” or “SURROUND OFF” will appear on the display.
DISC (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC” button to play a compact
disc.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
Error messages

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
 DISC 

Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.
Push “” (preset button 3) or “
” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.
Dolby

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the six following
error messages.

Ask

B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolby B Noise Reduction,
push “ ” (preset button 3). “
” will
appear on the display. Push the button
again to turn off Dolby B NR.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up–side
down). Clean the disc and re–insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

179

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to record the tape.
∗ : Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the
double D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.

FM
Push the “FM” button to turn on the radio
and select the FM band. “FM1”, “FM2” or
“FM TYPE” will appear on the display.
This system allows you to set twelve FM
and six RDS stations, three for each of
the preset button. If the RDS is off or
RDS stations are not preset to the preset
buttons, “FM TYPE” will not appear on the
display.
LOAD

To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on), then insert
the first compact disc. After the disc is
loaded, the shutter of the slot will close.
After a few seconds, the shutter will automatically open again so the next disc can
be inserted. The same process can be
applied for loading the rest of the discs.
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”
will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.
RDS (Radio Data System)

This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.

Your audio system is equipped with Radio
Data System (RDS). RDS station providing
good reception is automatically selected if
current reception worsens.

To load one compact
push and release the
a compact disc. After
the shutter of the slot

The “RDS” button turns the RDS on and
off. This button is operational except in
AM mode.

disc only, quickly
button, then insert
the disc is loaded,
will close.

To turn on the RDS, push and hold this
button until you hear a beep and “RDS”
will appear on the display. At this time,
the radio starts to search the RDS stations and “RDS SEARCH” will flash on the
display.
Quickly push and release this button when
the RDS turns on, the radio starts to
search the RDS stations and “RDS
SEARCH” will flash on the display.
When the RDS stations are found,
“FOUND” and the number of the RDS stations will appear on the display, and you
will hear two beeps. The stations will be
preset to the preset buttons.
If the RDS stations can not be found, “NO
RDS ST” will appear on the display and
you will hear a beep, and the display
returns to the previous mode.
To turn the RDS off, push the button until
you hear a beep again.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

180

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

RAND (Random)

RPT (Repeat)

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.

Cassette player

To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
” will appear on the
button 1). “
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while the
” will appear on
track is playing. “
the display. When the track ends, it will
automatically rewind and replay. To turn
off the repeat feature, push this button
again.

” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the top track of
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks in order for the repeat feature to work correctly.

SCAN

Compact disc player

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.

There are two repeat features—You can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.

Radio

To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold “
” or “” side of the
“SCAN” button until you hear a beep. The
radio will tune in the next preset station
up or down the band, stay there for 5
seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To stop scanning, push this
button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release “
” or “” side
of the “SCAN” button. The radio will find
the next station up or down the station
band, stay there for 5 seconds, and then
scan again to the next station. To stop
scanning, push this button again.

181

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Compact disc player

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

Radio

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release “
” or “” side
of the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear
on the display and the player will scan up
or down all the tracks on the disc you are
listening to. To stop scanning, push this
button again. If the player scanned all the
tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button. Do this again to find the
station after that.

Push “
” or “” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.

Cassette Player

ST (Stereo reception) display

Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push “
” or “” side of the “SCAN” but-

You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).

Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

ton until you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will
appear on the display and the player will
scan up or down the first track of the
next disc. To stop scanning, push this
button again. If the auto changer has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

A blank space of at least 3 seconds is
considered to be a start of a recording.
When a beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.

TAPE
Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassette
tape.

In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken word, live, or classical
recordings.

182

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TEXT
Radio
This button is operational only in RDS
mode.
When an RDS radio station transmits a
text message, “TEXT” will be displayed. At
this time, push the “TEXT” button to view
the text message. The message display
will be canceled if any button that affects
the display is pushed. To view the message again, push this button again. After
the entire message has been displayed,
the message will disappear.
The RDS audio system has memory to
store three 64–character messages. To
store a message in memory, push and
hold the “TEXT” button until you hear a
beep.
If three messages are already stored in
memory, the oldest message will be overwritten by the new message.
To recall a radio text message, push the
“TEXT” button momentarily. This will display the most recent message. Each push
of the button will display messages in the
order of most to least recent.

If no messages have been stored, or if
there are no more messages to be recalled, “NO MESSAGE” will appear on the
display, and the message display will be
canceled.
The message display will be canceled if
you activate any function that affects the
display.
Compact disc player
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)
This button turns the traffic announcement
(TA) feature on and off. This button is
operational only in FM mode.
By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAF
SEEK” will flash on the display and the
radio will start seeking any traffic program
station.
When a traffic program station is found,
“TRAF” will be displayed and you will hear
a beep.
After the traffic announcement program is
over, the display returns to the previous
mode.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO
TRAF INFO” appears on the display for a
few seconds and the display returns to
the previous mode.
To cancel the traffic announcement, push
this button again.
TUNE (Tuning)
Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to step
up the frequency. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the frequency.

183

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

TYPE (Program Types)
When you push the “TYPE” button while
receiving an RDS station, the current program type appears on the display.
Each time you push this button, the program type changes as in the following:










ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
RELIGION
MISC (Miscellaneous)
ALERT (Emergency message)

184

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Audio remote controls (steering switches)
Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Volume control switch
2. “
” switch
3. “MODE” switch

185

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1. Volume control switch
Push “+” to increase the volume. The volume continues to increase while the
switch is being pushed.
Push “–” to decrease the volume. The
volume continues to decrease while the
switch is being pushed.
2. “
” switch
Radio
This switch has the following features—
To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “
” or “”
side of the switch. Do this again to select
the next preset station.
To seek a station:
Push and hold the “
” or “” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you push
the switch on either side during the seek
mode, seeking will be cancelled.
Cassette player
This switch has the following features—
To skip
tion:
Quickly
side of
appear

to a different track in either direcpush and release the “
” or “”
the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will
on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switch
until the track you want to listen to is set.
If you push the switch ten times, the skip
function will turn off. (You can skip up to
nine tracks at a time.)

There must be at least 3 seconds of blank
space between tracks for the track switch
to work correctly. In addition, the feature
may not work well with some spoken, live,
or classical recordings.

When counting the number of the tracks
you want to rewind, remember to count
the current track as well. For example, if
you want to rewind to a song that is two
tracks before the song you are listening
to, push the “” side of the switch three
times.

To fast forward or reverse:
Push and hold the “
” side of the switch
to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” will
appear on the display. Push and hold the
“” side of the switch to rewind a tape.
“REW” will appear on the display.

If you push the track switch further than
you wanted to, push the other side of the
switch. The track number will be increased or reduced.

To stop the tape while it is fast forwarding, push the “
” side of the switch. To
stop the tape while it is rewinding, push
the “” side of the switch.

The track number you select is not valid
if it is higher than the number of the
tracks remaining on the current side of
the cassette.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassette
player will stop and then play that same
side. If a tape fast forwards completely,
the cassette will play the other side of the
tape using the auto–reverse feature.

 When the tape reaches to the begin-

Compact disc player

ning, the player will automatically start
playing that side.

 After the tape reaches to the end, the
player will automatically reverse and
start playing the other side.

Use this switch to skip up or down to a
different track in either direction.
Quickly push and release the “
” or “”
side of the switch until the track you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “” side of the switch once, quickly.

186

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Rear seat audio system—
With compact disc changer only—
Push and hold the “
” or “” side of the
switch until the disc you want to listen to
is set.
3. “MODE” switch
Push “MODE” switch to select an audio
mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use.
To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.
To turn the audio system off, push and
hold the “MODE” switch until the system
turns off.

The rear seat audio system is designed
for the rear seat passengers to enjoy the
audio sound separately between the front
seats and rear seats.
The rear seat audio system can be turned
on with the rear audio system controller
even if the front audio system is off.
When the front audio is turned off, the
rear audio system will be turned off simultaneously.
The rear passengers can enjoy all the
modes (AM and FM radio, cassette tape
player, compact disc player, compact disc
player with changer and DVD player) with
the rear seat audio system when a cassette tape and discs are loaded in the
front audio system.
When the same mode is selected on the
front and rear audio systems at the same
time, the system can be operated on the
front audio system.
If the radio mode is selected on the front
and rear audio systems at the same time,
AM and FM modes cannot be changed on
the rear seat audio system.
You can enjoy the rear seat audio system
with a special headphone. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

The wireless headphone can be used within a radius of approximately 7 m (23 ft.)
from the rear seat audio system. If the
signal becomes weak, the headphone will
mute.
You can purchase a wireless headphone
at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

 Do not drive with using the headphone. Otherwise, you may be hard
to hear the sound from the outside
while using the headphone and may
cause an accident.

 With DVD player:
Conversational speech on some
DVDs is recorded at a low volume
to emphasize the impact of sound
effects. If you adjust the volume
assuming that the conversations
represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may
be startled by louder sound effects
or when you change to a different
audio source. Be sure to adjust the
volume with this in mind.
Make sure the volume is not increased, before you turn on the
headphone.

187

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Rear seat audio system
controller
The rear seat audio system consists of
following components.
1. Front audio system
2. Rear seat audio system display

The rear seat audio system can be operated with the rear seat audio system controller.

CAUTION

3. Rear seat audio system controller
4. Controller holder

Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.

NOTICE
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.

188

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

USING THE CONTROLLER
To use the rear seat audio system controller, direct the signal output portion
of the controller to the signal reception
portion of the rear seat audio system
display.
The rear seat audio system controller can
be operated when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.
BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER
(for new vehicle owners)
A battery is already set in the controller with an insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being discharged. Before using the controller,
remove the insulating sheet.

Details of specific buttons, controls, and
features
of
the
controller,
see
“CONTROLLER FEATURES” on page 191
in this Section.

NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.
 Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.
 Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the controller.

189

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE
Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on the
instrument panel) for a long time,
otherwise the controller may be damaged.

CONTROLLER HOLDER
The controller can be stowed in the
holder when it is not in use. The holder
can be hooked on the back of the driver’s or front passenger’s seatback.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the holder when it is not in use.

190

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CONTROLLER FEATURES
1. “

” and “

” (DISC/CH/PROG) buttons

1. “ ” and “
tons

2. “

” and “

” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio

3. “ON/SOURCE” button
4. “OFF” button

” (DISC/CH/PROG) but-

You can scan only the preset stations for
the band of the front audio system. (For
instructions, see “—Controls and features”
on page 171 in this Section.)
To scan the preset stations:
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button. The radio will tune in the next
preset station up or down the band. The
station frequency will appear on the display.
Cassette tape player
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which
side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates
the top side, “ ” indicates the bottom
side.)
Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette
player reaches the end of a tape side, it
automatically reverses and begins to play
the other side. This is true whether the
cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

Compact disc player and DVD player
With disc changer only—
Use these buttons to select the disc you
want to listen to.
Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button until the number of the disc you
want to listen to appears on the display.
2. “

” and “

” (TUNE/TRACK) buttons

Radio
Use the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to tune or seek.
Tuning:
Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button briefly. Each time
you push the button, the radio will step up
or down to another frequency. If you push
and hold the button and the radio will go
into the seek mode.
Seeking:
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
TRACK) button. The radio will seek up or
down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time
you push the button, the stations will be
searched automatically one after another.

191

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Cassette tape player
To fast forward a cassette tape, push and
hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until
“FF” will appears on the display. Push and
hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until
“REW” appears on the display to rewind
a tape.
Use this button to skip up or down to
locate a song or recording.
You can select up to nine recordings (including current one).
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button. “FF 1” or “REW 1” will appear on the
display.
Next, push either side of
until the number on the
the number of tracks you
you push the button 10
feature will be turned off.

the track button
display reaches
want to skip. If
times, the skip

For the skip feature to work correctly a
blank space of at least 3 seconds is considered to be a start of a recording.
When a beginning of a tape is reached,
the player automatically resumes play.
When the end of the tape is reached, the
player automatically reverses sides and
resumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work well
with some spoken, live, or classical recordings.
Compact disc player and DVD player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button until the number of the track or chapter you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track or chapter, quickly push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button
one time.
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
TRACK) button to fast forward or reverse
within a disc. When you release the button, the disc player will resume playing.
With disc changer only—
You can either scan the tracks or chapters on a specific disc or scan the first
tracks or chapters of all the discs in the
changer.
Scanning the tracks or chapters on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button. “LOAD” will appear
on the display and the player will scan all
the tracks or chapters on the disc you are
listening to. To stop scanning, push this
button again. If the player scanned all the
tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks or chapters of all
the discs in the changer:
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/
TRACK) button. The player will scan the
first track or chapter of the next disc. To
stop scanning, release the button. If the
player has scanned all the discs, it will
stop scanning.
3. “ON/SOURCE” button
Push the “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on
the rear seat audio system.
Use the “ON/SOURCE” button to select an
audio mode when the rear seat audio system is on. Each time you push this button, the system changes between the radio, cassette player, compact disc player,
compact disc changer and DVD changer.
When you change the mode, the display
indicates which mode is selected.
When a cassette tape and discs are not
loaded in the front audio system, only a
radio mode can be selected in the rear
seat audio system.

192

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

If you push the “ON/SOURCE” button on
rear seat audio system controller to select
the casette tape player mode or disc player mode in that case, a beep sounds from
front audio system and “INVALID” flashes
on the display for 6 seconds, and then the
rear audio system returns to the radio
mode.

Tape mode

“CD” appears on the display while this
mode is selected.

If you push the “ON/SOURCE” button
while receiving an emergency broadcast,
a beep sounds and “INVALID” appears on
the display to indicate that no button can
be operated.

“OPEN”: The compact disc changer lid of
separate unit is open. Close the compact
disc changer lid.

The display shows the track, or track and
disc number currently being played.

If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

DVD video disc mode

4. “OFF” button

“DVD” appears on the display while this
mode is selected.

Push “OFF” button to turn off the rear
seat audio system.

Radio
AM mode
When you select the AM mode, “AM” will
appear on the display.
FM mode
When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or
“FM2” will appear on the display.
If the front audio system receives a traffic
announcement (TA) while the rear seat
audio system is in the radio mode,
“TRAF” will flash on the display and the
rear seat audio system will turn off. When
the front audio receives a traffic announcement (TA), the rear seat audio system cannot select the AM/FM mode.

“TAPE” appears on the display while this
mode is selected.

“ERR 3”: There is a problem inside the
system. Eject the disc or magazine. Set
the disc or magazine again.
“ERR 4”: Over–current. Ask your Toyota
dealer to inspect.

Disc players
Compact disc mode

The display shows the track or chapter, or
track or chapter and disc number currently
being played.
Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the five following
error messages.
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged
or inserted incorrectly (up–side down).
Clean the disc and re–insert it.
“ERR 2”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

193

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY
For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken that
small children do not swallow the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
 When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
 Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recommended by a Toyota dealer.
 Dispose of used batteries according
to the local regulations.

Replace the battery by using the following
procedures:
1. Pull the case out while pushing the
lock release button to the side.

2. Remove the discharged battery.
3. Put a new battery with the positive (+)
side up.
Put in the case securely.

194

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Car audio system operating
hints
NOTICE

NOTICE

 Make sure that the positive side of
the controller battery is facing correctly.

To ensure correct audio system operations:

 Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause rust.
 Do not touch or move any components inside of the controller, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
 Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the controller battery insertion
and that dust or oil does not adhere to the transmitter case.

 Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio system.
 Do not put anything other than a
cassette tape or compact disc into
the slot.
 The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the audio system. This does not indicate
a malfunction.

 Close the battery case securely.
RADIO RECEPTION
After replacing the battery, check that the
controller operates properly. If the controller still does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.

Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi–path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

195

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

AM

Use high–quality cassettes.

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere—especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.

 Low–quality cassette tapes can cause

Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.

 Do not use a cassette if it has been

Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

 Store cassettes in their cases and out

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER
AND TAPES
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.

 A dirty tape head or tape path can
decrease sound quality and tangle your
cassette tapes. The easiest way to
clean them is by using a cleaning tape.
(A wet type is recommended.)

many problems, including poor sound,
inconsistent
playing
speed,
and
constant auto–reversing. They can also
get stuck or tangled in the cassette
player.
damaged or tangled or if its label is
peeling off.

 Do not leave a cassette in the player
if you are not listening to it, especially
if it is hot outside.
of direct sunlight.

 Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than 100 minutes (50
minutes per side). The tape used in
these cassettes is thin and could get
stuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR
PLAYER AND DISCS

COMPACT

DISC

 Your compact disc player is intended
for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.

 Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player from working.
On hot days, use the air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you
listen to a disc.

 Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
cause
skip.

your

compact disc

player to

 If moisture gets into your compact disc
player, you may not hear any sound
even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Remove the
disc from the player and wait until it
dries.

CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible
laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate
the player correctly.

196

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

 Use only compact discs marked as

Special shaped discs

shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.

Labeled discs

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the player or
changer, do not use special shaped,
low quality or labeled discs such as
those shown in the illustrations.

Copy–protected CD
CD–R (CD–Recordable)
CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)
CD–ROM

Low quality discs

197

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Correct

Wrong

 Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.

 Dirt, scrapes, warping, pin holes, or
other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
soft, lint–free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint–free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti–static device.

 Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.

198

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel and rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

200
207
207
210

199

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Controls (without “DUAL” button)
1. Fan speed selector
2. “AUTO” button
3. Temperature selector
4. “A/C” button
5. Air flow selector
6. Air intake selector
7. “OFF” button

200

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

“AUTO” button

Temperature selector

For automatic operation of the air conditioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indicator light will illuminate to show that the
automatic operation mode has been selected.

To increase the temperature, push the
“UP” side, to decrease it, push the
“DOWN” side.

In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on–off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.
When you push the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
To turn off the automatic operation, push
the “OFF” button.
Fan speed selector
Select the mode button you desire to adjust the fan speed and push it. An indicator light will illuminate to show which fan
speed mode is being selected.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
“OFF” button
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
conditioning system.

Air flow selector
Push one of the buttons to select the
vents used for air flow. An indicator light
will illuminate to show which air flow
mode is being selected.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.
1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument
panel vents and rear vents.
2. Bi–level—Air flows from both the floor
vents, the instrument panel vents and
rear vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

201

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, push the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, push the button again.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.
When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents and
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
This button allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.

Air intake selector
Push the button to select the air source.
An indicator light will illuminate to show
which the air source is being selected.
1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

202

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Controls (with “DUAL” button)
1. Fan speed selector
2. Temperature selector
(at the independent mode: for driver)
(at the linked mode: for driver and
front passenger)
3. “AUTO” button
4. “DUAL” button
5. Temperature selector
(for front passenger)
6. Air flow selector
7. Air intake selector
8. “A/C” button
9. “OFF” button

203

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

“AUTO” button

Temperature selector

For automatic operation of the air conditioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indicator light will illuminate to show that the
automatic operation mode has been selected.

To increase the temperature, push the “
”
side, to decrease it, push the “” side.

In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on–off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.

“DUAL” button

When you push the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
To turn off the automatic operation, push
the “OFF” button.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
This button is used to set the temperatures independently for the driver’s seat
and front passenger seat.
Pushing the button changes
from independent and linked.

the mode

Independent mode: Temperatures can be
set independently for the driver’s seat and
front passenger’s seat. An indicator light
will illuminated to show that the independent mode has been selected.

Fan speed selector

Linked mode: The same temperature is
set for the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat.

Select the mode button you desire to adjust the fan speed and push it. An indicator light will illuminate to show which fan
speed mode is being selected.

When the temperature for the front passenger’s seat is changed in linked mode,
the mode is changed automatically to independent mode.

In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.

“OFF” button

Air flow selector
Push one of the buttons to select the
vents used for air flow. An indicator light
will illuminate to show which air flow
mode is being selected.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
conditioning system.

204

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrument
panel vents and rear vents.
2. Bi–level—Air flows from both the floor
vents, the instrument panel vents and
rear vents.

For details about air flow selector settings,
see “Air flow selector settings” described
below.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.
When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents and
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
This button allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

Air intake selector
Push the button to select the air source.
An indicator light will illuminate to show
which the air source is being selected.
1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air inside
the vehicle.
2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

205

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, push the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, push the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer for service.

206

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Air flow selector settings

Operating tips

 To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.


 Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).


 On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.


 Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.


 On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.


 When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting.

207

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 If following another vehicle on a dusty
road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.

Heating

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls as follows:

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—ON

For manual operation—

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards WARM
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards COLD
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON


 For quick heating, select recirculated


 For quick cooling, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been warmed.

air for a few minutes.


 Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.


 Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

208

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Ventilation

Defogging and defrosting

For best results, set controls as follows:

—The inside of the windshield

For automatic operation—

For best results, set controls as follows:

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards COLD
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF

—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.


 On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.
—The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls as follows:
—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD

When pressing the windshield air flow button, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.

209

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Instrument panel and rear
vents
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
When pressing the windshield air flow button, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake
selector button once again.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.


 To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting
the
windshield,
floor/windshield air flow.

Center vents

choose

Rear vents

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents and rear vents.
The instrument panel vents and rear vents
may be opened or closed as shown.

Side vents

210

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

1– 9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Multi–information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tissue box holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trash holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cup holders and tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie–down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grocery bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo net hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof luggage carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

212
215
220
222
223
226
228
229
230
230
231
232
234
234
235
235
235
236
238
239

211

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Multi–information display—
1. “RESET” button
2. “MODE” button
3. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”
button—Cruise information display
Air conditioning system with “DUAL”
button—Outside temperature and cruise
information display
4. Clock
5. Air conditioning system without “DUAL”
button only—Outside temperature
display
6. “:00” button
7. “M” button
8. “H” button

212

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Outside temperature display
—Before using the
multi–information display

(air conditioning system without
“DUAL” button)

—Clock

Operate the multi–information display
with the ignition switch on.
When the ignition switch is turned to
“ON”, the last previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is
turned off will appear.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the multi–information
display, the display will automatically be
set to the initial mode.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

The digital clock indicates the time.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.

The outside temperature display indicates the outside air temperature. The
displayed value is updated.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The displayed temperature ranges from
–30C (–22F) up to 50C (122F).

If quick adjustment to a full hour is desired, push the “:00” button.

If there is some abnormality in the connection of the outside air temperature sensor, “––C” (“––F”) will appear on the
display. If “––C” (“––F”) appears on the
display, contact your Toyota dealer.

For example, if the “:00” button is depressed when the time is between
1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.
If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the
time will change to 2:00.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).

There may be a case that “––C” (“––F”)
appears momentarily when the ignition is
quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it
goes out soon.

213

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Cruise information display
The outside temperature display (air
conditioning system with “DUAL” button) and cruise information display indicates the following information.
Air conditioning system with
“DUAL” button only—

Every time you push the “MODE” button, the display toggles through this
information.
1. Outside temperature
2. Driving range

1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE C”
or “OUTSIDE F”)
The outside temperature display indicates the outside air temperature.
The displayed value is updated every 1
second.
The displayed temperature ranges from
–30C (–22F) up to 50C (122F).

5. Display off

If there is some abnormality in the connection of the outside air temperature sensor, “––C” (“––F”) will appear on the
display. If “––C” (“––F”) appears on the
display, contact your Toyota dealer.

The displayed values in the cruise information display indicate general driving
conditions. Accuracy varies with driving
habits and road conditions.

There may be a case that “––C” (“––F”)
appears momentarily when the ignition is
quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it
goes out soon.

3. Average fuel consumption
4. Average vehicle speed

214

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Compass
2. Driving range
(“RANGE MI” or “RANGE km”)

3. Average fuel consumption
(“AVG. MPG” or “AVG. L/100 km”)

The distance the vehicle can travel with
the remaining fuel is calculated and
displayed based on the quantity of remaining fuel and past fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption is calculated
and displayed based on total driving
distance and total fuel consumption
with the engine running.

The driving range display indicates the
approximate distance that you can drive
until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is
different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated about every 10 seconds.

The displayed value is updated about every 10 seconds.

4. Average vehicle speed
(“AVG. MPH” or “AVG. km/h”)

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the calculation is reset.

Average vehicle speed is calculated and
displayed based on total driving distance and total driving time with the
engine running.

The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will be
longer. If fuel consumption is poor, the
driving range will be shorter.
If the low fuel level warning light comes
on, refuel even if the display indicates
that the vehicle can be driven further.

To reset the calculation, push
“RESET” button about 1 second.

the

The displayed value is updated about every 10 seconds.
To reset the calculation, push
“RESET” button about 1 second.

the

The direction is indicated on the inside
rear view mirror.
If the ignition switch was turned off with
the system on, the system will automatically turn back on when the ignition switch
is turned on.
Push the “COMP” switch to turn the compass system on and off.

215

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The compass indicates the direction
that the vehicle is heading. In the
above case, it shows that the vehicle is
heading north.
Displays

Directions

N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW

North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest

The compass may not show the correct
direction in the following conditions:

 The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

 The compass does not adjust while the
vehicle is stopped.

 The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.

 The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

 The vehicle is in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

 The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
magnet or a metal object on or near
the inside rear view mirror.)

 The battery has been disconnected.
Your vehicle is out of the set zone. Refer
to the “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” below to set the zone number.
The compass works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in
motion, if deviation is small.
For additional precision or for complete
calibrating,
see
“CALIBRATING
THE
COMPASS” below.

Compass sensor

The compass sensor is on the windshield.

NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object
on or near the inside rear view mirror
of the vehicle. Doing this may cause
malfunction of the compass sensor.

216

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation
calibration)
The direction display on the compass
deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
angle of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,
then push and hold the “COMP” switch
until the zone number appears on the display. Then push the “COMP” switch, referring to the following map to select the
number of the zone where the vehicle is.

217

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Hawaii:
Samoa:
Guam:
Saipan:

5
5
8
8

After calibration, leaving the system for
several seconds returns it to the compass
mode.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

Zone number

218

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Perform circling calibration just after
you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or disconnected.

 Do not perform circling calibration of
the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling
calibration)
Sometimes the direction display on the
compass may not change after a turn. To
rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and
hold the “COMP” switch until “C” appears
on the display.
If “C” appears on the display because of
a drastic change in the magnetic field,
perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5
mph) or less. If there is not enough space
to drive in a circle, drive around the
block.

 During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above
method, calibration is completed when the
direction is shown on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because
of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your
vehicle to Toyota dealer.

219

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Power outlet (12 VDC)
CAUTION

 When doing the circling calibration,
be sure to secure a wide space,
and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while
performing circling calibration.

 Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed
power supply for car accessories.

for

In the rear console box—To use the
power outlet, push the lid of the auxiliary box to open.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”
position for the power outlet to be used.

Rear console box

220

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Power outlet (115 VAC)
NOTICE
 To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of 12
VDC/120W.
 To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
 Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting a foreign object other than
the appropriate plug that fits the
outlet, or allowing any liquid into
the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for use
as a power supply for electric appliances in the vehicle.
The key must be in the “ON” position for
the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the power outlet is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn
the power outlet off. When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.

221

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Glove box
NOTICE
 To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
 Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet
may cause electrical failure or short
circuits.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even
though their power consumption is under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances
may not operate properly.

 Appliances with high initial peak wattage: cathode–ray tube type televisions,
compressor–driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.

 Measuring devices which process precise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.

 Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply: microcomputer–
controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.
To use the glove box, do this.
To open: Pull the lever.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
glove box light will come on.
To lock: Insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.

222

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Garage door opener
On some models, an auxiliary box is
located inside the glove box.
To increase the capacity of the glove box,
raise the lower panel of the auxiliary box.


The garage door opener (
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

223

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

(a) Programming the HomeLink
The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand–held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLink button.

To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLink, install a new battery in the
hand–held transmitter prior to programming.

4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

The battery side of the hand–held transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in “Programming an entrance gate/programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons
you want to program.
2. Place your hand–held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the
“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.

Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code”
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.

224

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor
should
now
recognize
the
HomeLink unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another rolling code system.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.

Programming an entrance gate/programming all devices in the Canadian market

Programming other devices

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
2. Place
your
hand–held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away
from
the
surface
of
the
HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.
3. Press
and
hold
HomeLink button.

the

selected

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand–held gate/device transmitter
button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.

(c) Erasing
the
entire
HomeLink
memory (all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink
memory.

Reprogramming a button
buttons cannot be
Individual HomeLink
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the
appropriate HomeLink button to activate
the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The
HomeLink continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.

225

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Auxiliary boxes—
CAUTION

 When programming the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

 Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
lids as shown in the following illustrations.

FCC ID: CB2300NHL3
CANADA: 2791032088
This device complies with FCC Rules
Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference that may be received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and
DOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
partly responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the device.

CAUTION

 To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the auxiliary box
closed while driving.

 Type A—As this holder is designed
for holding a light object such as
eyeglasses, do not place any heavy
objects in them. Heavy objects may
cause the holder to open and the
contents to fly out resulting in injuries.

NOTICE
Type A—During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses,
etc. inside.

226

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Type A (over head console)

Type C (rear console box)

Type B (instrument panel)

Type D (rear tire house)

Type E (right side of luggage compartment)

227

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Using the holding belts

Rear console box
CONSOLE BOX TABLE
To use the console box table, open it.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the table closed while
driving.

NOTICE
The right side of luggage compartment
auxiliary box is equipped with a belt to
hold the objects.
To use the belt, do the following.

To prevent damage to the table, do
not place any object heavier than 1
kg (2.20 lb.) on it, and do not leave
any object on the table for a long
time.

1. To loosen: Pull the buckle forward.
2. To tighten: Pull on the belt.
Make sure the objects are securely held.

228

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Tissue box holder
The rear console box is equipped with
a tissue box holder on the inside of the
rear console box lid.
To use the tissue box holder:
1. Pull up the console box lid while pushing the lock release button.
2. Place a tissue box in the lid.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, keep the console box
lid closed when it is not in use.

CONSOLE BOX
To access the rear console box, pull up
the console box lid while pushing the
lock release button.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

229

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Coin holder

Trash holder
The rear console box is equipped with
a coin holder.
To use the coin holder:
1. Pull up the console box lid while pushing the lock release button.
2. Push coins down into the holder.
The coin holder is detachable.

230

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Front cup holders
The trash holder is designed to use the
grocery bag as a trash bag.
To use the trash holder:
1. Raise the trash holder.
2. Fit the grocery bag onto the holder by
hanging its handles on the two hooks
indicated at the left and right.
The trash holder can support to 1 kg
(2.20 lb.).

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, keep the trash holder
closed when it is not in use.

If the trash holder is pulled strongly or
stepped on, it will detach from the rear
console box to protect it from damaging.
If the trash holder becomes detached, reinstall it in a horizontal direction as indicated in the illustration. It cannot be
installed in any other direction.

NOTICE
Do not deliberately pull or step on
the trash holder, as it may be damaged or broken.

231

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Rear cup holders and tray
The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink–cans securely.
The cup holder can be adjustable to the
size of the cups or drink–cans by
changing the holder position and the
arm position, as shown.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
front cup holder position indicator lights
will come on.

CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than
cups or drink–cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injured people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.

1. To use the rear cup holders and tray,
pull the armrest out.

232

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink–cans securely.
2. To use the rear cup holder, push and
pull it out.

3. To use the tray, pull it out.

CAUTION

 Do not place anything else other
than cups or drink–cans in the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.

 To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when it is not in use.

 To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the tray closed
while driving.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the tray, do not
place any object heavier than 2 kg
(4.40 lb.) on it, and do not leave any
object on the tray for a long time.

233

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Bottle holders

Tie–down hooks
The bottle holders are designed to hold
bottles securely.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to use the holder for
any other purpose for which it was
intended. Inappropriately sized or
shaped objects may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during a
sudden braking or an accident.
Front doors

NOTICE
Do not put a cup or open bottle in
the bottle holder because the contents may spill when the door opens
or closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie–
down hooks as shown above.
See “Luggage stowage precautions” on
page 253 in Section 2 for precautions
when loading luggage.

CAUTION
To avoid personal injury, keep the tie–
down hooks folded in place on the
floor when not in use.

NOTICE
Rear doors

Do not use the seat anchors instead
of the tie–down hooks.

234

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Grocery bag hooks

These hooks are designed
things like grocery bags.

Cargo net hooks

to

hang

Luggage cover

These hooks are designed to hang the
cargo net.

NOTICE

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo net
hooks and rear tie–down hooks.

To prevent damage to the hook, do
not hang any object heavier than 1 kg
(2.20 lb.) in it.

Although the cargo net itself is not included as an original equipment, these
hooks can be used to hang the cargo net.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the hook, avoid
hanging things other than a cargo net
on it.

235

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Double deck
USING LUGGAGE COVER
To use the luggage cover:
1. Attach the front hooks of the luggage cover to the head restraint.
2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and
hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION
Do not place anything on the luggage
cover. Such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in
the vehicle during sudden braking or
an accident.

REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the double deck:

To remove the luggage cover, detach its
hooks from the head restraint. Then,
retract and release both ends, and remove the luggage cover.

1. Turn the left and right knobs from
the
“LOCK”
position
to
the
“UNLOCK” position.

After you remove the luggage cover, place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent passengers
from injury in the event of a sudden stop
or accident.

236

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

NOTICE
When using the double deck at the
raised position, do not place any object heavier than 30 kg (66 lb.).

2. Hold the handle and raise the double
deck on the rear tire houses.

3. Turn the left and right knobs from
the “UNLOCK” position to the
“LOCK” position.
Make sure the double deck is securely
locked.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop,
make sure that the double deck
knobs are always in the “LOCK” position when the double deck is in the
raised or lowered position.

237

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Roof luggage carrier
CAUTION

Paint mark

When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:

 Place the cargo so that its weight
is distributed evenly between the
front and rear axles.

 If loading long or wide cargo, never

The roof luggage carrier consists of
roof rails (1) attached to the roof and
sliding cross rails (2).
To adjust the positions of cross rails, do
this.
1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise
loosen the cross rails.

to

2. Slide the cross rails to the desired
position for loading the luggages of
various sizes.
3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the
cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions when installing the attachments or their equivalent.

When there is no luggage on the roof
luggage carrier, Toyota recommends that
the front and rear cross rails be secured
in the positions indicated in the illustration, according to the following procedure.
This may diminish wind noise during driving.
1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise
loosen the cross rails.

to

2. Slide the ends of the cross rails to the
paint mark.
3. Be sure to tighten the cross rails by
turning knobs clockwise.

exceed the vehicle overall length or
width. (See “Dimensions and cargo
load” on page 352 in Section 8 for
information on your vehicle overall
length and width.)

 Before driving, make sure the cargo
is securely fastened on the roof
luggage carrier.

 Loading cargo on the roof luggage
carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

238

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Floor mat
 If driving for a long distance, on
rough roads, or at high speeds,
stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo
remains in its place.

 Do not exceed 54 kg (120 lb.) cargo
weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE
When loading the luggages, be careful
not to scratch the surface of the
moon roof.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2
holes, then they are designed for use with
locking clips. Fix the floor mat with locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet.

CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the floor carpet. If the floor
mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

239

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

240

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

7– 1

DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do–it–yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

316
318
318
320

315

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Engine compartment overview

1GR–FE engine
1. Windshield and back window washer
fluid tank
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil level dipstick
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Fuse block
8. Battery
9. Condenser
10. Radiator

316

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


2UZ–FE engine
1. Windshield and back window washer
fluid tank
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil level dipstick
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Fuse block
8. Battery
9. Condenser
10. Radiator

317

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Do–it–yourself service
precautions

Fuse locations

Spare
fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do–it–yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do–
it–yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 320 in this Section.
Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:

should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-

318

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION

 When the engine is running, keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)

 Right

after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold, power steering
fluid reservoir and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.

 If the engine is hot, do not remove
the radiator cap or loosen the drain
plugs to prevent burning yourself.

 Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.

 Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.

 Use eye protection whenever you
work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

 Used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.

 Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.

 Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.

 Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

 Warning: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer
and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE
 Remember that battery and ignition
cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
 Add only demineralized or distilled
water to fill the radiator. And if you
spill some of the coolant, be sure
to wash it off with water to prevent
it from damaging the parts or paint.
 Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.
 Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.
 Do not reuse iridium–tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.
 Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission
could be damaged.
 Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.

319

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Parts and tools
 Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
 When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do–it–yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Tools:

Parts (if level is low):

 “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

Parts (if level is low):

 SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
brake fluid

 Rag or paper towel
 Funnel (only for adding fluid)

lent

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID

See page 325 in Section 7–2 for details about engine oil selection.

Parts (if level is low):

 Automatic

transmission
DEXRONII or III

Tools:

 Rag or paper towel
 Funnel (only for adding oil)
CHECKING
LEVEL

THE

ENGINE

fluid

Tools:
COOLANT

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Parts (if level is low):

 “Toyota Genuine Long Life Coolant” or
equivalent
See page 326 in Section 7–2 for details about coolant type selection.

 Demineralized or distilled water
Tools:

 Rag or paper towel
 Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Tools:






Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)

wrench

(for

 Funnel (only for adding coolant)

320

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

terminal

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
Parts (if replacement is necessary):

 Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:

 Water
 Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for
winter use)
Tools:

 Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:

 Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original (See charts in “Replacing light bulbs” on page 344 in
Section 7–3.)
Tools:

 Screwdriver

321

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

322

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

7– 2

DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

324
326
328
328
329
330
332
333
334
335
336
337

323

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking the engine oil level
Low level

Full level

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.

If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.

1. To get a true reading, the vehicle
should be on a level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes
for the oil to drain back into the bottom
of the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under
the end and wipe it clean.
Add oil

O.K.

Too full

1GR–FE engine

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.

Low level

Be careful not to touch the hot exhaust manifold.

Too full

Oil quantity, L (qt., lmp. qt.):
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)

 Be careful not to spill the engine
oil on the vehicle components.
 Avoid overfilling, or
could be damaged.

the

engine

 Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

NOTICE
O.K.

When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand–tight.

NOTICE

Full level

CAUTION

Add oil

The approximate quantity of oil needed to
fill between the low level and the full level
on the dipstick is indicated below for reference.

Be careful not to drop the engine oil
on the vehicle components.

2UZ–FE engine

324

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is filled in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.

If SAE 5W–30 is not available, SAE
10W–30 may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W–30 at
the next oil change.

Oil grade:
API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
SAE 5W–30
API service symbol

Outside temperature

SAE 5W–30 is the best choice for good
fuel economy and good starting in cold
weather.
ILSAC certification mark

325

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking the engine coolant
level
Oil identification marks

Look at the see–through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, add ethylene–glycol
type coolant for a proper corrosion
protection of aluminum components.

Either or both API registered marks are
added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil
quality by API (American Petroleum Institute) designations such as SL. The center
portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity grade such as SAE 5W–30. “Energy–
Conserving” shown in the lower portion,
indicates that the oil has fuel–saving capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the front of
the container.

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.

Always use ethylene–glycol type coolant
for a proper corrosion protection of aluminum components. See information in the
next column.
If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain
cock and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

326

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system. Your coolant
must contain ethylene–glycol type coolant
for proper corrosion protection of your
engine
that
contains
aluminum
components.
We have used “Toyota Genuine Long Life
Coolant” in your Toyota vehicle. In order
to avoid technical problems, we strongly
recommend using “Toyota Genuine Long
Life Coolant” or equivalent.
In addition to preventing freezing and
subsequent damage to the engine, this
type of coolant will also prevent corrosion.
Further supplemental inhibitors or additives
are neither needed nor recommended.

Read the coolant container for information
on freeze protection. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix
with plain water (preferably demineralized
water or distilled water). The total capacity
of the cooling system is given on page
353 in Section 8.
We recommend a 50% solution for your
Toyota, to provide protection down to
about –35C (–31F). When it is extremely cold, to provide protection down to
about –50C (–58F), a 60% solution is
recommended. Do not use more than 70%
solution for better coolant performance.

NOTICE
Do not use alcohol type antifreeze or
plain water alone.

The engine cooling system is integral to
maximizing performance of your Toyota
vehicle. In line with this, it is strongly
recommended that you use “Toyota
Genuine Long Life Coolant” for protecting
the system, as it is an ethylene–glycol
based premium antifreeze coolant with
excellent corrosion protection properties
that has been specifically formulated for
use in Toyota vehicles.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Long
Life Coolant”.

327

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking the radiator and
condenser

Checking brake fluid

If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

Refilling brake fluid:
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 40
times.

CAUTION

3. Remove the reservoir cover by hand.
Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

If you do not follow the procedure above,
the reservoir may overflow.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see–through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.

CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
eyes and damage painted surfaces. If
fluid gets in your eyes, flush your
eyes with clean water immediately. If
you still feel uncomfortable with your
eyes, go to the doctor.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.

328

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking power steering fluid
NOTICE
If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash
it off with water to prevent it from
damaging the parts or paint.

If cold O.K.

If hot O.K.

Close
Open
If cold
add
If hot
add

Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (60C—80C or 140F—175F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is
cold
(about
room
temperature,
10C—30C or 50F—85F) if the engine
has not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from outside of the reservoir
tank and look at the fluid level. If the fluid
is cold, the level should be in the “COLD”
range. Similarly, if it is hot, the fluid level
should be in the “HOT” range. If the level
is at the low side of either range, add
automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III to bring the level within the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
for leaks or damage.

CAUTION
The reservoir tank may be hot so be
careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

329

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking and replacing the
air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter is behind the
glove box.
The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air conditioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily.

1. Open the glove box. Remove the
screw with a Phillips–head screwdriver and slide the hook as shown.

2. Push each side of the glove box to
disconnect the claws.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.)

330

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.

3. Remove the filter case by holding
both sides.

4. Remove
case.

the

filter

from

the

filter

5. Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is the just moderately dusty, it may
be cleaned by blowing compressed air
from the reverse surface. Do not wash or
oil the filter.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.
When setting the filter to the filter case,
ensure that the flat side of the filter is
down and the ribbed side is up.
Position the filter case so that the “↑UP”
mark is pointing up and install it in the
vehicle.

331

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking tire pressure
Incorrect tire pressure may waste fuel,
reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire
life and make your vehicle less safe to
drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.

The recommended cold tire pressures, tire
size and the cargo load are given on
pages 352 and 356 in Section 8. They are
also on the tire pressure label as shown.
You should check the tire pressure every
two weeks, or at least once a month. And
don’t forget the spare!


 Poor handling

 Excessive wear at the center of the
tire tread


 A greater possibility of tire damage
from road hazards

CAUTION

Keep your tire pressures at the proper
level.

High tire pressure (overinflation)—

Keep your tire pressure properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation)—


 Excessive wear

 Uneven wear

 Poor handling

 Possibility of blowouts from overheated tire


 Poor sealing of the tire bead

 Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

332

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking and replacing tires
The following instructions for checking
tire pressure should be observed:

If you have tire damage such as cuts,
splits, cracks deep enough to expose
the fabric, or bulges indicating internal
damage, the tire should be replaced.

Tread wear indicator


 The pressure should be checked only
when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been packed for at least 3
hours and has not been driven for
more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you
will get an accurate cold tire pressure
reading.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location
of a cut or other damage, it should be
replaced. If you are not sure, consult with
your Toyota dealer.


 Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of a tire can be misleading. Besides, tire pressures that
are even just a few pounds off can
degrade ride and handling.


 Do not bleed or reduce tire pressure
after driving. It is normal for the tire
pressure to be higher after driving.


 Never exceed the vehicle capacity
weight. The passenger and luggage
weight should be located so that the
vehicle is balanced.


 Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve caps,
dirt or moisture could get into the valve
core and cause air leakage. If the caps
have been lost, have new ones put on
as soon as possible.

If an air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving with a deflated tire. Driving even a short distance can damage a
tire beyond repair.
CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire tread for the tread wear
indicators. If the indicators show, replace the tires.
The tires on your Toyota have built–in
tread wear indicators to help you know
when the tires need replacement. When
the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm (0.06
in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If
you can see the indicators in two or more
adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced. The lower the tread, the higher
the risk of skidding.

Any tires which are over 6 years old
must be checked by a qualified technician even if damage is not obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This also applies to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost
if the tread wears down below 4 mm
(0.16 in.).

333

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Rotating tires
REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of the
same size and construction, and the
same or greater load capacity as the
originally installed tires. Also, on four–
wheel drive models, all the tires must
be the same brand and have the same
tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire may
seriously affect handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration, ground clearance,
and clearance between the body and tires
or snow chains.


 Four–wheel drive models:
Do not use tires of different brands,
sizes, construction or tread patterns, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
Toyota recommends all four tires, or at
least both front or rear tires be replaced as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page 283
in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

CAUTION

When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.

Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Wheels can get out
of balance with regular use and should
therefore be balanced occasionally.


 Do not mix radial, bias belted, or
bias–ply tires on your vehicle, as
this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control.


 Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size,
as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the air
valve should also be replaced with a
new one.

To equalize the wear and help extend
tire life, Toyota recommends that you
rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) However, the most appropriate timing for tire
rotation may vary according to your
driving habits and road surface conditions.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page 283
in Section 4 for tire change procedure.

334

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Installing snow tires and
chains
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out–of–balance
wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO
CHAINS

USE

SNOW

TIRES

OR

Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.


 Four–wheel drive models:
Do not use snow tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or tread
patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Also, on four–wheel drive models, all
the tires must be the same brand and
have the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.


 Do not use snow tires other than
the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.

CAUTION


 Do not drive with the snow tires
incorrectly inflated.


 Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
with any type of snow tires.

335

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Replacing wheels
TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.
Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check the local
regulations before installing chains.
CHAIN INSTALLATION
Install the chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the front tires. Retighten
chains
after
driving
0.5—1.0
km
(1/4—1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION


 Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or


 Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheel
braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.


 When driving with chains installed,
be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.
WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.


 Drive

carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.

336

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.


 Do not use wheels other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size,
as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.


 Four–wheel drive models:
Do not use
brands, sizes
may cause
characteristics
control.

Aluminum wheel precautions

 When installing aluminum wheels,
check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).


 If

you have
changed your
wheel nuts are
1600 km (1000

rotated, repaired or
tires, check that the
still tight after driving
miles).


 When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.


 Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for
wheels.

your

aluminum


 When balancing your wheels, use only
Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.


 As with any wheel, periodically check
your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

wheels of different
and types, as this
dangerous handling
resulting in loss of

337

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

338

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

SECTION

7– 3

DO–IT–YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

340
341
342
343
344

339

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking battery condition—
—Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.


 Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.


 Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.


 Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.


 Never ingest electrolyte.

 Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.


 Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES


 If electrolyte gets in your eyes,
flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medical office.

—Checking battery exterior

 If electrolyte gets on your skin,

Terminals

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.


 If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
there is a
through to
ly take off
follow the
essary.

possibility of its soaking
your skin, so immediatethe exposed clothing and
procedure above, if nec-


 If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.


 Warning: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer
and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.

Ground cable

Hold–down
clamp

Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold–down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold–down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.

340

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Checking battery condition
NOTICE
 Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
 When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“–” mark) first and reinstall it last.

During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.

Type A
Green

Dark

Clear or light
yellow

White

Red

Type B
Blue

Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.

 Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
 Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.

CAUTION


 Always charge the battery in an un-

CHECKING BY INDICATOR
If the battery is disconnected or run
down, the power window, power back window and moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam protection function
will not function correctly, and does not
open the back door after you reconnect,
replace or recharge the battery. In any of
these cases, you should normalize the
power window, power back window, back
door and moon roof. To normalize them,
see “Power windows” on page 23, “Power
back window” on page 26, “Back door” on
page 29 and “Electric moon roof” on page
35 in Section 1–2.

Battery recharging precautions

Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
Indicator color

Condition


 Only do a slow charge (5 A or

Type A

Type B

Green

Blue

Good

White

Charging necessary.
Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

Dark

Clear or
light
yellow

Red

confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.

Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

341

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Checking and replacing fuses
Type A fuses can be pulled out by using
the pull–out tool. The location of the pull–
out tool is shown in the illustration.

Type A

If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Good

Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.

Blown

Type B

If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
Good

Blown

Type C

See “Fuse locations” on page 318 in Section 7–1 for locations of the fuses.
Turn the ignition switch and inoperative
component off. Pull a suspected fuse
straight out and check it.

Good

Blown

Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 356 in Section 8 of this manual for
the functions controlled by each circuit.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “PWR
OUTLET” or “HEATER NO.2” fuse, which
may be dispensable for normal driving,
and use it if its amperage rating is the
same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
as possible to the rating. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

342

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Adding washer fluid
You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
If any washer does not work, the washer tank may be empty. Check the washer fluid level on the level gauge. If the
washer fluid level is below “LOW” or
only slightly above the “LOW” level,
add washer fluid.
For vehicles sold in Canada—
If any washer does not work or low
windshield washer fluid level warning
light comes on, the washer tank may be
empty. Add washer fluid.

343

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Replacing light bulbs—
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION


 To prevent burning yourself, do not
replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.


 Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas

The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogged up in the rain. However,
if there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

344

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Light bulbs

Bulb No.

W

Type

Headlights (high beam)

9005

60

A

Headlights (high and low beams)

9006

51

B

Front fog lights

9006

51

B

Parking and front side marker lights

168

5

D

—

21

D

4157NAK

27/8

D

—

21

D

Front turn signal lights
(without daytime running light system)
Front turn signal lights
(with daytime running light system)
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

—

21/5

C

Back–up lights

921

16

C

License plate lights

168

5

C

High mounted stoplight

921

16

C

Interior light

—

8

E

Personal lights

—

5

C

Vanity lights

—

3

E

Door courtesy lights

—

3.8

C

Glove box light

—

1.2

C

Luggage compartment light

—

8

E

Running board lights

—

3.8

C

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

HB3 halogen bulbs
HB4 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Double end bulbs

345

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Headlights
Low beam
(outside)

High beam
(inside)

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise
to the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector
into the mounting hole and turn
them clockwise to the front of the
vehicle.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

346

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Front fog lights

1. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise
to the front of the vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Install a new bulb and connector
into the mounting hole and turn
them clockwise to the front of the
vehicle.

347

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—Parking and front side
marker lights

—Front turn signal lights

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail,
rear side marker and back–up
lights

Use a flat–bladed screwdriver which is
wrapped with a cloth.

348

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

—License plate lights

—High mounted stoplight
Clips

a: Rear turn signal light
b: Stop/tail and rear side marker light
c: Back–up light

Use a Phillips–head screwdriver.

Disconnect the clips by using a flat–
bladed screwdriver which is wrapped with
a cloth.

349

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

350

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

If your name

Owner Information Change Form

or address has
■ Same owner, name and/or address has changed

Check one:

EVV

■ New owner, purchased vehicle used

■ Same owner, additional driver who should receive product/safety updates

changed or you
purchased your
Toyota as a used

■ Mr.

■ Mrs.

■ Ms.

■ Miss

/
Mo.

Vehicle Identification Number (required to process change)

/
Day

vehicle, please
Year

complete and
mail the attached

■ Dr.

card, even if your
warranty coverage
First name

M.I.

Last name
Check here if
address below
is for company

has expired. This

■

Company name

will enable Toyota
to contact you
with important

Street address or P.O. Box

City

–

–

Home phone number

–

–

State

/

–

Apt. or suite number

product or safety

–

updates concerning your vehicle.

Zip code

If the card is no

–

longer attached,

Work phone number

Extension

Social Security Number
(optional; for Toyota customer reference only)

please call the
Toyota Customer
Assistance Center at

This information is obtained solely for the use of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
Toyota occasionally sends special promotional offers to registered owners. Check here if you prefer not to receive these offers.

■

(800) 331-4331.

www.toyota.com

Effective date of
this information

Owner’s
Warranty
Information

00452-02003-REV1

Printed in U.S.A. 11/02

Table of Contents

Introduction
Satisfaction Down the Road

2

Transportation Assistance

3

If You Need Assistance

4

Warranty Coverages at a Glance

6

Your Warranties in Detail
General Warranty Provisions

7

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

9

Federal Emission Control Warranty

14

California Emission Control Warranty

20

Tire Limited Warranty

26

Your Responsibilities
Operation and Maintenance

27

Obtaining Warranty Service

29

1

Satisfaction Down the Road

A

t Toyota, our top priority is always our customers. We know
your Toyota is an important part of your life and something you
depend on every day. That’s why we’re dedicated to building
products of the highest quality and reliability.
Our excellent warranty coverage is evidence that we stand behind the
quality of our vehicles. We’re confident — as you should be — that your
Toyota will provide you with many years of enjoyable driving.
To further demonstrate our commitment to our customers’ satisfaction,
occasionally we may establish a special policy adjustment to pay for specific repairs that are no longer covered by warranty. When we establish
such a policy adjustment, we mail details to all applicable owners we
have on record. That’s why it’s important to send in the card at the back
of this booklet if you change your address or if you’ve purchased this
vehicle from a previous owner.
To provide you with added protection against unexpected service costs,
we offer Toyota Extra Care vehicle service agreements and Toyota Auto
Care pre-paid maintenance programs. Both offer plans to meet a wide

2

Introduction

variety of needs. Your dealership can help you select the plan that’s best
for you.
Our goal is for every Toyota customer to enjoy outstanding quality,
dependability and peace of mind throughout their ownership experience. We want you to be a satisfied member of the Toyota family for
many miles to come.
This booklet describes the terms of Toyota warranty coverage
as well as general owner responsibilities. A separate publication
found in your glove box, the Scheduled Maintenance Guide,
describes your vehicle’s maintenance requirements. Be sure to
review this publication carefully, since proper maintenance is
required to ensure that warranty coverage remains intact.
All information in this booklet is the latest available at the time of publication and, with the exception of the emission control warranties, is
subject to change without notice.

Transportation Assistance

W

e realize that your confidence in the quality and reliability
of our products was a key factor in your decision to buy a
Toyota. We also know how disruptive the loss of transportation
can be to your daily routine. That’s why we’re pleased to offer you the
benefits of our Transportation Assistance Policy.

The Transportation Assistance Policy applies for the duration of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The policy applies to all 2003 model-year
Toyotas sold and serviced by authorized Toyota dealerships in the
mainland United States and Alaska.
For further details, please consult your Toyota dealer.

Under this policy, you are eligible for transportation assistance if your
Toyota must be kept overnight for warranty-covered repairs. The policy
applies when your vehicle must be kept overnight for any of the following reasons:

• The warranty repairs will take longer than one day to complete.
• The warrantable condition requires extensive diagnosis.
• The parts needed for the warranty repairs are not readily available
and your vehicle is inoperative or unsafe to drive.
The policy does not apply when warranty repairs can be completed
in one day but the vehicle must be kept overnight due to dealer or
owner scheduling conflicts.

Introduction

3

If You Need Assistance

Both Toyota and your Toyota dealer are dedicated to serving your
automotive needs. Your complete satisfaction is our first priority. Should
you have a problem or concern — either during or after the warranty
period — please take the following steps to ensure the quickest possible
response:

Please have the following information ready when you call:

Step 1

A Toyota customer relations representative will assist you in
working with the dealership to find a satisfactory solution.

Discuss the situation with a dealership manager, such as the service
manager or customer relations manager. In most cases, a satisfactory
solution can be reached at this step.

Step 2
If the dealership does not address your concern to your satisfaction,
call the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at (800) 331–4331. If you
are hearing- or speech-impaired, call (800)443-4999 (TDD).

4

Introduction

• Your Toyota’s vehicle identification number (located on the
driver’s side corner of the dashboard, under the window)

• Current mileage on your vehicle
• Name of your Toyota dealership

Step 3
If your concern has still not been resolved to your satisfaction, Toyota
offers additional assistance through the Dispute Settlement Program,
a dispute resolution program administered by the National Center for
Dispute Settlement. The purpose of the Dispute Settlement Program
is to resolve disputes through arbitration — a process by which two
parties authorize an independent third party to hear and resolve a dispute. The program is informal and free of charge. To request that your

If You Need Assistance

case be reviewed through the program, complete the customer claim
form in the Owner's Warranty Rights Notification booklet (found in your
glove box) and mail it to:
National Center for Dispute Settlement
P.O. Box 561109
Dallas, TX 75356-1109

This information about the Dispute Settlement Program is correct
as of the date of printing. However, the program may be changed
without notice. For the most current information about the Dispute
Settlement Program, call the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at
(800)331-4331.

If you would like to request a customer claim form, call the Toyota
Customer Assistance Center at (800)331-4331. When you call, please
have your vehicle identification number, the current mileage on your
Toyota and the names of your selling and servicing dealerships.
Important: You must use the Dispute Settlement Program before seeking
remedies through a court action pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act. You may also be required to use the Dispute Settlement
Program before seeking remedies under the “Lemon Laws” of your state.
Please check the appropriate page of the Owner’s Warranty Rights
Notification booklet for the requirements applicable to your state.

Introduction

5

Warranty Coverages at a Glance

New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Basic

36 months / 36,000 miles

Powertrain

60 months / 60,000 miles

Restraint Systems

60 months / 60,000 miles

Corrosion Perforation

60 months / Unlimited miles
10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

months

30

40

50

60

70

80

months

Performance
Specific Components

24 months / 24,000 miles
96 months / 80,000 miles

Defect
Specific Components

36 months / 36,000 miles1
96 months / 80,000 miles

California 2,3

Federal

Emission Control Warranty

Performance

36 months / 50,000 miles

Short-Term Defect

36 months / 50,000 miles1

Long-Term Defect

84 months / 70,000 miles
10

1
2

6

20

Specific components may have longer coverage under terms of the Powertrain Warranty.
Also applies to Massachusetts and Vermont vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control System.
Vehicles covered by this warranty are also covered by the Federal Emission Control Warranty.

Introduction

3

For 4-cylinder Camry models certified as partial zero-emission vehicles (PZEV),
if any, coverage is 15 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

General Warranty Provisions

Who Is the Warrantor

When Warranty Begins

The warrantor for these limited warranties is Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (“Toyota”), 19001 South Western Avenue, Torrance, California
90509-2991, a California corporation.

The warranty period begins on the vehicle’s in-service date, which is the
first date the vehicle is either delivered to an ultimate purchaser, leased,
or used as a company car or demonstrator.

Which Vehicles Are Covered

Repairs Made at No Charge

These warranties apply to all 2003 model-year vehicles registered and
normally operated in the United States, U.S. territories and Canada.
Warranty coverage is automatically transferred at no cost to subsequent
vehicle owners.

Repairs and adjustments covered by these warranties are made at no
charge for parts and labor.

Multiple Warranty Conditions
This booklet contains warranty terms and conditions that may vary
depending on the part covered. A warranty for specific parts or systems,
such as the Powertrain Warranty or Emission Performance Warranty, is
governed by the coverage set forth in that warranty as well as the
General Warranty Provisions.

Parts Replacement
Any needed parts replacement will be made using new or remanufactured parts. The decision whether a part should be repaired or replaced
will be made by the servicing Toyota dealership and/or Toyota. Parts
scheduled to be replaced as required maintenance are warranted until
their first replacement only.

Your Warranties in Detail

7

General Warranty Provisions

Limitations
The performance of necessary repairs and adjustments is the exclusive
remedy under these warranties or any implied warranties. Toyota does
not authorize any person to create for it any other obligation or liability
in connection with this vehicle.
Any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose is limited to the duration of these written warranties.
Some states do not allow restrictions on how long an implied warranty
lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you.

Your Rights Under State Law
These warranties give you specific legal rights. You may also have other
rights that vary from state to state.

8

Your Warranties in Detail

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

WHAT IS COVERED AND HOW LONG
Basic Warranty

Engine

This warranty covers repairs and adjustments needed to correct defects in
materials or workmanship of any part supplied by Toyota, subject to the
exceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on pages 11–12.

Cylinder block and head and all internal parts, intake manifold, timing
gears and gaskets, timing chain/belt and cover, flywheel, valve covers,
oil pan, oil pump, engine mounts, turbocharger housing and all internal
parts, supercharger housing and all internal parts, engine control computer, water pump, fuel pump, seals and gaskets.

Coverage is for 36 months or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first, with
the exception of wheel alignment and wheel balancing, which are covered for 12 months or 20,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Powertrain Warranty
This warranty covers repairs needed to correct defects in materials or
workmanship of any component listed in the next column and supplied
by Toyota, subject to the exceptions indicated under “What Is Not
Covered” on pages 11–12.
Coverage is for 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Transmission and Transaxle
Case and all internal parts, torque converter, clutch cover, transmission
mounts, transfer case and all internal parts, engine control computer,
seals and gaskets.

Front-Wheel-Drive System
Final drive housing and all internal parts, axle shafts, drive shafts,
constant velocity joints, front hub and bearings, seals and gaskets.

Rear-Wheel-Drive System
Axle housing and all internal parts, propeller shafts, U-joints, axle
shafts, drive shafts, bearings, supports, seals and gaskets.

Your Warranties in Detail

9

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Corrosion Perforation Warranty

Restraint Systems Warranty

This warranty covers repair or replacement of any original body panel
that develops perforation from corrosion (rust-through), subject to the
exceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on pages 11–12.

This warranty covers repairs needed to correct defects in materials or
workmanship of any seatbelt or air bag system supplied by Toyota,
subject to the exceptions indicated under “What Is Not Covered” on
pages 11–12.

Coverage is for 60 months, regardless of mileage.
For information on how to protect your vehicle from corrosion, see the
section entitled “Corrosion Prevention and Appearance Care” in the
Owner’s Manual.

Coverage is for 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
For vehicles sold and registered in the state of Kansas, the warranty for
seatbelts and related components is 10 years, regardless of mileage.

Towing
When your vehicle is inoperable due to failure of a warranted part,
towing service to the nearest authorized Toyota dealership is covered.

10

Your Warranties in Detail

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

WHAT IS NOT COVERED
This warranty does not cover damage or failures resulting directly or
indirectly from any of the following:

This warranty also does not cover the following:

• Fire, accidents or theft
• Abuse or negligence
• Misuse — for example, racing or overloading
• Improper repairs
• Alteration or tampering, including installation of non-Genuine

Tires

Toyota Accessories

• Lack of or improper maintenance, including use of fluids other
than those specified in the Owner’s Manual

• Installation of non-Genuine Toyota Parts
• Airborne chemicals, tree sap, road debris (including stone chips),
rail dust, salt, hail, floods, wind storms, lightning and other
environmental conditions

• Water contamination

Tires
Tires are
are covered
covered by
by aa separate
separate warranty
warranty provided
provided by
by the
the tire
tire manufacmanufacturer.
See
page
26.
turer. See page 26.

Normal
Normal Wear
Wear and
and Tear
Tear
Noise,
conditions and
and other
other deterioration
deterioration caused
Noise, vibration,
vibration, cosmetic
cosmetic conditions
caused by
by
normal
wear
and
tear.
normal wear and tear.

Maintenance
Maintenance Expense
Expense
Normal
Normal maintenance
maintenance services
services such
such as:
as:
Engine
tune-ups
• Engine tune-ups

•
•• Replacement
Replacement of
of fluids
fluids and
and filters
filters
Lubrication
•• Lubrication
•• Cleaning
Cleaning and
and polishing
polishing
Replacement
of
•• Replacement of spark
spark plugs
plugs and
and fuses
fuses
Replacement
of
worn
wiper
blades,
•• Replacement of worn wiper blades, brake
brake pads/linings
pads/linings and
and clutch
clutch linings
linings
Your Warranties in Detail

11

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Vehicles With Altered Odometer

Disclaimer of Extra Expenses and Damages

Failure of a vehicle on which the odometer has been altered so that
actual vehicle mileage cannot be readily determined.

The performance of necessary repairs and adjustments is the exclusive remedy under this warranty or any implied warranty. Toyota
does not authorize any person to create for it any other obligation
or liability in connection with this vehicle. Toyota shall not be liable
for incidental or consequential damages resulting from breach of
this written warranty or any implied warranty. Any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose is limited
to the duration of this written warranty, except in states where this
limitation is not allowed.

Salvage or Total-Loss Vehicles
Any vehicle that has ever been issued a “salvage” title or similar title
under any state’s law; or has ever been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by a financial institution or insurer, such as by payment for a claim in
lieu of repairs because the cost of repairs exceeded the cash value of the
vehicle. This exclusion does not apply to the emission control warranties.

Incidental Damages
Incidental or consequential damages associated with a vehicle failure.
Such damages include but are not limited to inconvenience; the cost of
transportation, telephone calls and lodging; the loss of personal or commercial property; and the loss of pay or revenue.

12

Your Warranties in Detail

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If a dispute arises regarding your warranty coverage, please follow the
steps described under “If You Need Assistance” on pages 4–5. Please
note that you must use the Dispute Settlement Program before seeking
remedies through a court action pursuant to the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act. You may also be required to use the Dispute Settlement
Program before seeking remedies under the “Lemon Laws” of your state.
Please check the appropriate page of the Owner’s Warranty Rights
Notification booklet (located in your glove box) for the requirements
applicable to your state.

Your Warranties in Detail

13

Federal Emission Control Warranty

WHAT IS COVERED AND HOW LONG
Emission Defect Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

Toyota warrants that your vehicle:

Some states and localities have established vehicle inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs to encourage proper vehicle maintenance. If an
EPA-approved I/M program is in force in your area, you are eligible for
Emission Performance Warranty coverage.

• Was designed, built and equipped to conform at the time of sale with
applicable federal emissions standards.

• Is free from defects in materials and workmanship that may cause the
vehicle to fail to meet these standards.
Federal regulations require that this warranty be in effect for two years
or 24,000 miles from the vehicle’s in-service date, whichever occurs
first. However, under the terms of the Basic Warranty, Toyota provides
coverage of three years or 36,000 miles, whichever occurs first. Specific components may have longer coverage under the terms of the
Powertrain Warranty. Additionally, components marked “8/80” in the
parts list on pages 15–16 have coverage of eight years or 80,000 miles,
whichever occurs first.

14

Your Warranties in Detail

Under the terms of the Emission Performance Warranty and federal
regulations, Toyota will make all necessary repairs if both of the
following occur:

• Your vehicle fails to meet applicable emissions standards as
determined by an EPA-approved emissions test.

• This failure results or will result in some penalty to you — such
as a fine or denial of the right to use your vehicle — under local,
state or federal law.
This warranty is in effect for two years or 24,000 miles from the vehicle’s
in-service date, whichever occurs first. Additionally, components marked
“8/80” in the parts list on pages 15–16 have coverage of eight years or
80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Federal Emission Control Warranty

WHAT IS NOT COVERED

WARRANTY PARTS LIST

These warranty obligations do not apply to failures or non-compliance
caused by:

Air/Fuel Metering System

• The use of replacement parts not certified in accordance with
aftermarket parts certification regulations.

• The use of replacement parts not equivalent in quality or design
to original equipment parts.
Provisions under the “What Is Not Covered” section of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty also apply to this warranty.

• Air/fuel ratio feedback control system
• Cold-start enrichment system
• Deceleration control system
• Electronic fuel injection system components
— Airflow sensor
— Engine control module (8/80)
— Throttle body
— Other components

Air Induction System

• Intake manifold and intake air surge tank
Catalyst System

• Catalytic converter and protector (8/80)
• Constricted fuel filler neck
• Exhaust manifold
• Exhaust pipe (manifold to catalyst and/or catalyst to catalyst)
8/80 = Covered for eight years or 80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Your Warranties in Detail

15

Federal Emission Control Warranty

Evaporative Control System

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

• Charcoal canister
• Diaphragm valve
• Fuel filler cap
• Fuel tank
• Vapor liquid separator

• Oil filler cap
• PCV valve or orifice

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

• EGR gas temperature sensor
• EGR valve
• Associated parts

Other Parts Used in Above Systems

• Data link connector (8/80)
• Hoses, clamps, fittings, tubing and mounting hardware
• Malfunction indicator light and bulb (8/80)
• Pulleys, belts and idlers
• Sealing gaskets and devices
• Sensors, switches and valves

Ignition System

• Distributor and internal parts
• Ignition coil and ignitor
• Ignition wires
• Spark plugs*

* Warranted until first required maintenance under terms of the
California Emission Control Warranty.
8/80 = Covered for eight years or 80,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

16

Your Warranties in Detail

Federal Emission Control Warranty

MAINTENANCE

REPLACEMENT PARTS

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indicated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.
Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not have
records to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, any failure
or noncompliance caused by lack of maintenance is not covered by this
warranty.

To ensure optimum performance and maintain the quality built into
your vehicle’s emission control systems, Toyota recommends the use of
Genuine Toyota Parts when servicing or repairing the systems.

When maintenance and repairs are paid for by you, these services
may be performed by you or by any automotive service provider you
choose. Toyota will not deny a warranty claim simply because you
used a service provider other than a Toyota dealership for maintenance and repairs. However, any failure or non-compliance caused by
improper maintenance or repairs is not covered by this warranty.

Warranty coverage is not dependent upon the use of any particular
brand of replacement parts and you may elect to use non–Genuine
Toyota Parts for maintenance and repairs. However, use of replacement parts that are not equivalent in quality to Genuine Toyota
Parts may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.
If you use replacement parts that have maintenance or replacement
schedules different from those of Genuine Toyota Parts, you must follow
the maintenance and replacement schedules for the parts you are using.
In addition, you should ensure that such parts are warranted by their
manufacturers to be equivalent to Genuine Toyota Parts.

Your Warranties in Detail

17

Federal Emission Control Warranty

IF YOUR VEHICLE FAILS AN EMISSIONS TEST

IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS

If your vehicle fails an EPA-approved emissions test, you may make a
claim under the Emission Performance Warranty. To do so, take your
vehicle to an authorized Toyota dealership and present a copy of the
emissions test report. Also, take your maintenance records in case they
are needed.

If you have questions or concerns about your vehicle’s federal emission
warranty coverage, please follow the steps described under “If You Need
Assistance” on pages 4–5. In the case of the Emission Performance
Warranty, you may also request information from or report complaints to:

If your claim qualifies for coverage, the dealership will repair your vehicle within 30 days (unless a shorter period is required by law). If your
claim is denied, Toyota will notify you in writing of the reason within
the same period. If we fail to do so, we will repair your vehicle free of
charge. The only exceptions allowed are when you request or agree to a
delay, or a delay is caused by factors beyond the control of Toyota or the
dealership.
For information on how to obtain service under the Emission Defect
Warranty, see page 29, “Obtaining Warranty Service.”

18

Your Warranties in Detail

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Vehicle Programs & Compliance Division (6405J)
Attn: Warranty Complaints
401 M Street SW
Washington, D.C. 20460
Vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control System
that are registered and operated in California or any state that
adopts California emission warranty provisions are also covered by
the California Emission Control Warranty (see page 20). Currently,
Massachusetts and Vermont are the only other states to which the
California Emission Control Warranty applies.

Federal Emission Control Warranty

DEALER CERTIFICATE
We (the dealership) want you to know that at the time your new Toyota
vehicle is being delivered:
1) On the basis of written notification furnished by Toyota, we have
knowledge that the vehicle is covered by an EPA Certificate of
Conformity.
2) We have visually inspected those emission control devices or portions
thereof that are visible without removing or adjusting any components or systems, emissions-related or otherwise. On the basis of this
inspection, there are no apparent deficiencies in the installation of
emission control devices by Toyota. (For purposes of this certificate,
“emission control devices” is limited to devices installed on a vehicle
for the sole or primary purpose of controlling emissions and which
were not in general use before 1968.)
3) We have performed all emission control system preparations required
by Toyota prior to the sale of the vehicle as set forth in Toyota’s current pre-delivery service manual.
4) Except as may be provided in Paragraph 5, if this vehicle fails an
EPA-approved emissions test within three months or 4,000 miles
(whichever comes first) of delivery to the ultimate purchaser, and the
vehicle has been maintained and used in accordance with the written instructions for proper maintenance and use, Toyota will remedy

the non-conformity free of charge under the terms of the Emission
Performance Warranty.
5) If vehicle was used as a company car or demonstrator, check box and
complete the following:
□ The vehicle with which this statement is delivered was placed

into service as a company car or demonstrator prior to delivery.
The Emission Performance Warranty period commenced on the
date the vehicle was first placed into service, which was:
Month

Day

Year

Note: The dealership makes no representation or warranty that the
emission control system or any part thereof is without defect or that
the system will perform properly. The Emission Performance Warranty
referred to in Paragraph 4 and furnished with the vehicle is solely that
of the manufacturer.
This statement is required by section 207 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C.
7541) and the EPA regulations issued thereunder.

Dealership Name

Your Warranties in Detail

19

California Emission Control Warranty

YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS
AND OBLIGATIONS

MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY COVERAGE

The California Air Resources Board (CARB) and Toyota are pleased to
explain the emission control system warranty for your 2003 vehicle. In
California, new motor vehicles must be designed, built and equipped to
meet the state’s stringent anti-smog standards. CARB regulations require
that Toyota must warrant the emission control system on your vehicle for
the time periods indicated on this page, provided there has been no
abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your vehicle.

1) For three years or 50,000 miles, whichever occurs first:*

Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection
system, ignition system, catalytic converter and engine computer. Also
included may be hoses, belts, connectors and other emissions-related
assemblies.
Where a warrantable condition exists, Toyota will repair your vehicle at
no cost to you, including diagnosis, parts and labor.

• If your vehicle fails a smog-check test, all necessary repairs and
adjustments will be made by Toyota to ensure that your vehicle
passes the test. This is your Emission Control System PERFORMANCE
WARRANTY.

• If any emissions-related part on your vehicle is defective, the part
will be repaired or replaced by Toyota. This is your SHORT-TERM
Emission Control System DEFECT WARRANTY. Covered parts are listed
on pages 15–16. Specific components may have longer coverage
under the terms of the Powertrain Warranty.
2) For seven years or 70,000 miles, whichever occurs first:*

• If an emissions-related part listed on pages 22—23 is defective,
the part will be repaired or replaced by Toyota. This is your
LONG-TERM Emission Control System DEFECT WARRANTY.

* For 4-cylinder Camry models certified as partial zero-emission vehicles (PZEV),
if any, coverage is 15 years or 150,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

20

Your Warranties in Detail

California Emission Control Warranty

OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES

WHAT IS NOT COVERED

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indicated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.
Toyota recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance on
your vehicle, but Toyota cannot deny warranty coverage solely for the
lack of receipts or your failure to ensure the performance of all scheduled
maintenance.

These warranty obligations do not apply to failures or noncompliance
caused by:

You are responsible for presenting your vehicle to a Toyota dealership as
soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs should be completed in a
reasonable amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.

• The use of replacement parts not certified in accordance with
aftermarket parts certification regulations.

• The use of replacement parts not equivalent in quality or design to
original equipment parts.
Provisions under the “What Is Not Covered” section of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty also apply to this warranty.

You should also be aware that Toyota may deny you warranty coverage if
your vehicle or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications.
If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and responsibilities, you should contact the Toyota Customer Assistance Center at
(800)331-4331 or the California Air Resources Board, Mobile Source
Control Division, at 9528 Telstar Avenue, P.O. Box 8001, El Monte, CA
91734-8001.

Your Warranties in Detail

21

California Emission Control Warranty

PARTS LIST: LONG-TERM EMISSION
DEFECT WARRANTY
The parts listed here are covered for seven years or 70,000 miles from
the vehicle’s in-service date, whichever occurs first.

Air/Fuel Metering System

• Catalytic converter (warm-up three-way catalyst)
• Exhaust center pipe on Avalon, Corolla Matrix 4WD, Highlander
equipped with 1MZ-FE, Tacoma and Tundra equipped with 5VZ-FE

• Air-fuel ratio sensor on Highlander
• Engine control computer (engine control module)
• Fuel pump on Sienna
• Mass air flow sensor on Tacoma equipped with 2RZ-FE and 3RZ-FE
• Throttle body

• Exhaust front pipe on Avalon, Camry, Camry Solara, Celica, Corolla,

Air Induction System

• Exhaust manifold gasket on Land Cruiser, Sequoia, Tundra equipped

• Intake manifold and intake air surge tank
• Intake manifold gasket on MR2 Spyder

22

Catalyst System

Your Warranties in Detail

Corolla Matrix 2WD, ECHO, Highlander equipped with 1MZ-FE, Land
Cruiser, MR2 Spyder, Sequoia, Sienna, Tacoma, Tundra and 4Runner

• Exhaust manifold on Avalon, Camry, Camry Solara, Highlander, Land
Cruiser, MR2 Spyder, RAV4, Sequoia, Sienna, Tundra equipped with
2UZ-FE and 4Runner
with 2UZ-FE and 4Runner

• Right exhaust manifold gasket on Sienna and on Avalon, Camry,
Camry Solara and Highlander models equipped with 1MZ-FE

California Emission Control Warranty

MAINTENANCE
Evaporative Control System

• Charcoal canister on Highlander, Land Cruiser and 4Runner
• Fuel tank
Ignition System

• Knock sensor on Land Cruiser, MR2 Spyder, Sequoia, Tacoma
equipped with 5VZ-FE, Tundra and 4Runner

You are responsible for performance of the required maintenance indicated in the Owner’s Manual and the Scheduled Maintenance Guide.
Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not have
records to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, any failure
or noncompliance caused by lack of maintenance is not covered by this
warranty.
When maintenance and repairs are paid for by you, these services
may be performed by you or by any automotive service provider you
choose. Toyota will not deny a warranty claim simply because you
used a service provider other than a Toyota dealership for maintenance and repairs. However, any failure or non-compliance caused by
improper maintenance or repairs is not covered by this warranty.

Your Warranties in Detail

23

California Emission Control Warranty

REPLACEMENT PARTS

IF YOUR VEHICLE FAILS A SMOG-CHECK TEST

To ensure optimum performance and maintain the quality built into
your vehicle’s emission control systems, Toyota recommends the use of
Genuine Toyota Parts when servicing or repairing the systems.

If your vehicle fails a smog-check test, you may make a claim under the
Emission Performance Warranty. To do so, take your vehicle to an authorized Toyota dealership and present a copy of the smog-check test
report. Also, take your maintenance records in case they are needed.

Warranty coverage is not dependent upon the use of any particular
brand of replacement parts and you may elect to use non-Genuine
Toyota Parts for maintenance and repairs. However, use of replace–
ment parts that are not equivalent in quality to Genuine Toyota
Parts may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.
If you use replacement parts that have maintenance or replacement
schedules different from those of Genuine Toyota Parts, you must follow
the maintenance and replacement schedules for the parts you are using.
In addition, you should ensure that such parts are warranted by their
manufacturers to be equivalent to Genuine Toyota Parts.

24

Your Warranties in Detail

If your claim qualifies for coverage, the dealership will repair your vehicle within 30 days (unless a shorter period is required by law). If your
claim is denied, Toyota will notify you in writing of the reason within
the same period. If we fail to do so, we will repair your vehicle free of
charge. The only exceptions allowed are when you request or agree to
a delay, or a delay is caused by factors beyond the control of Toyota or
the dealership.
For information on how to obtain service under the Emission Defect
Warranty, see page 29, “Obtaining Warranty Service.”

California Emission Control Warranty

REPAIR DELAYS

IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS

If a Toyota dealership is unable to complete repairs on your vehicle
within 30 days, you may have the repairs made under Toyota’s
provisions for emergency warranty repairs. See page 29 for details.

If you have questions or concerns about your vehicle’s California emission warranty coverage, please follow the steps described under “If You
Need Assistance” on pages 4–5. You may also request information from
or report complaints to:
California Air Resources Board
Mobile Source Control Division
9528 Telstar Avenue
P.O. Box 8001
El Monte, CA 91734-8001
(800)242-4450
Vehicles equipped with a California Certified Emission Control System
that are registered and operated in California or any state that
adopts California emission warranty provisions are covered by this
warranty. Currently, Massachusetts and Vermont are the only other
states to which this warranty applies. Vehicles covered by this
warranty are also covered by the Federal Emission Control Warranty
(see page 14).

Your Warranties in Detail

25

Tire Limited Warranty

OBTAINING WARRANTY SERVICE

ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRE MANUFACTURERS

The tires that come as original equipment on your vehicle are warranted
by their manufacturer and not Toyota. A separate warranty statement for
the tires is in your glove box.

Bridgestone/Firestone
One Bridgestone Park
Nashville, TN 37214
(800)847-3272

Michelin/BFGoodrich
P.O. Box 19001
Greenville, SC 29602
(800)847-3435

Continental General Tire
1800 Continental Blvd.
Charlotte, NC 28273
(800)847-3349

Toyo Tire (U.S.A.) Corporation
6261 Katella Ave., Ste. 2B
Cypress, CA 90630
(800)442-8696

Goodyear Dunlop Tires
North America, Ltd.
P.O. Box 1109
Buffalo, NY 14240
(800)548-4714

Yokohama Tire Corporation
601 South Acacia Avenue
Fullerton, CA 92831
(800)722-9888

To obtain service for a tire defect, take the tire to an authorized dealer
of the tire manufacturer. (Refer to your local phone directory for dealer
locations.) Your Toyota dealer may also be able to assist you in obtaining
warranty service from the manufacturer.
For additional warranty information or service assistance, contact the
tire manufacturer directly.

Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co.
1144 East Market Street
Akron, OH 44316
(800)321-2136

26

Your Warranties in Detail

Operation and Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATION

WHERE TO GO FOR MAINTENANCE

You are responsible for ensuring that your Toyota is operated and maintained according to the instructions in the Owner’s Manual and the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide.

You may have maintenance performed on your vehicle by any qualified
person or facility. However, Toyota recommends having maintenance
performed by an authorized Toyota dealership.

You should keep detailed records of vehicle maintenance, since under
some circumstances they may be required for warranty coverage. These
records should include date of service, mileage at time of service and a
description of service performed and/or parts installed. For your convenience, a maintenance log is included in the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide. If you sell your vehicle, you should give your maintenance records
to the new owner.

Toyota dealership technicians are specially trained to maintain and repair
Toyota vehicles. They stay current on the latest service information
through Toyota technical bulletins, service publications and training
courses. Many are also certified through the Toyota Certification
Program, which involves a series of rigorous written examinations. Feel
free to ask any Toyota dealership to show you its technicians’ credentials.

Toyota will not deny a warranty claim solely because you do not have
records to show that you maintained your vehicle. However, damage or
failures caused by lack of proper maintenance are not covered under
warranty.

You can be confident you’re getting the best possible service for your
vehicle when you take it to a Toyota dealership. Plus, a Toyota dealership will always use Genuine Toyota Parts designed specifically for your
vehicle.

Your Responsibilities

27

Operation and Maintenance

REPLACEMENT PARTS
Warranty coverage is not dependent upon the use of any particular
brand of replacement parts. However, Toyota recommends using only
Genuine Toyota Parts when you need to replace a part on your vehicle.
Like all Toyota products, Genuine Toyota Parts are built to the highest
standards of quality, durability and performance. They are also designed
to fit your vehicle’s exact specifications.
Your Toyota dealership maintains an extensive inventory of Genuine
Toyota Parts to meet your vehicle service needs. And because it is linked
electronically to Toyota’s Parts Distribution Centers, the dealership has
quick access to any parts it may not have in stock.
Genuine Toyota Parts are covered by their own warranty (see your dealer
for details) or the remainder of any applicable New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, whichever is longer. Non–Genuine Toyota Parts, or any
damage or failures resulting from their use, are not covered by
any Toyota warranty.

28

Your Responsibilities

Obtaining Warranty Service

BY GEOGRAPHIC REGION

EMERGENCY REPAIRS

In the United States, U.S. Territories
and Canada

If your vehicle is inoperable or unsafe to drive and there is no Toyota
dealership reasonably available to make repairs, you may perform the
repairs yourself or have them performed by another automotive service
provider. Toyota will reimburse you for any of the repairs that are covered by warranty. To receive reimbursement, present to an authorized
Toyota dealership your paid repair invoices and any parts that were
removed from the vehicle. You will be reimbursed for warranted parts
at the manufacturer’s suggested retail price and warranted labor at a
geographically appropriate hourly rate multiplied by Toyota’s recommended time allowance for the repair.

To obtain warranty service in the United States, U.S. territories or Canada,
take your vehicle to an authorized Toyota dealership. If your vehicle
cannot be driven, contact your nearest Toyota dealership for towing
assistance. You do not have to pay for towing to the nearest Toyota dealership if your vehicle is inoperable due to failure of a warranted part.

Outside the United States, U.S. Territories
and Canada
If you are using your vehicle outside the United States, U.S. territories
and Canada and need warranty service, contact a local Toyota dealership. Please note, however, that your vehicle may not be repaired free
of charge because the local Toyota distributor may have no obligation to
provide warranty service for your vehicle, and/or your vehicle may not
comply with local regulatory or environmental requirements.

If your vehicle requires emergency repair, Toyota assumes no liability
for subsequent failures caused by improper repairs or the use of nonGenuine Toyota Parts unless you have the vehicle properly repaired in a
timely manner. To ensure that warranty coverage remains intact, have
your vehicle inspected by an authorized Toyota dealership as soon as
possible after an emergency repair.

Your Responsibilities

29

Notes

30

Notes

31

Notes

32

If your name

Owner Information Change Form

or address has
■ Same owner, name and/or address has changed

Check one:

EVV

■ New owner, purchased vehicle used

■ Same owner, additional driver who should receive product/safety updates

changed or you
purchased your
Toyota as a used

Effective date of
this information

■ Mr.

■ Mrs.

■ Ms.

■ Miss

/
Mo.

Vehicle Identification Number (required to process change)

/
Day

vehicle, please
Year

complete and
mail the attached

■ Dr.

card, even if your
warranty coverage
First name

M.I.

Last name
Check here if
address below
is for company

has expired. This

■

Company name

will enable Toyota
to contact you
with important

Street address or P.O. Box

City

–

–

Home phone number

–

–

State

/

–

Apt. or suite number

product or safety

–

updates concerning your vehicle.

Zip code

If the card is no

–

longer attached,

Work phone number

Extension

Social Security Number
(optional; for Toyota customer reference only)

please call the
Toyota Customer
Assistance Center at

This information is obtained solely for the use of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
Toyota occasionally sends special promotional offers to registered owners. Check here if you prefer not to receive these offers.

■

(800) 331-4331.

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value–conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble–free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle best and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. He will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:


 U.S. OWNERS:
Toyota Customer Assistance Center

 CANADIAN OWNERS: Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre

Toll–free: 1–800–331–4331
Toll–free: 1–888–TOYOTA–8 (1–888–869–6828)

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

 2003

TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.

i

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Important information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty

Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Toyota

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
warranties:

A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.
You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or
adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.


 New vehicle warranty

 Emission control systems warranty

 Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.

This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non–genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the
modification may not be covered under warranty.

Your responsibility for
maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of
these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section
6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important Information About Your Toyota

iii

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)


 Traction control system (two–wheel drive models)

Spark ignition system of your
Toyota


 Active traction control system
(four–wheel drive models)

 Vehicle stability control system

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing Equipment
Standard.


 Downhill assist control system
(four–wheel drive models)

 Hill–start assist control system

 Rear height control air suspension

 Cruise control system

Installation of a mobile
two–way radio system


 Anti–lock brake system

 Electronic throttle control system

As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system in
your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as follows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system

 SRS airbag system

 Seat belt pretensioner system

iv

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Scrapping of your Toyota

On–pavement and off–road
driving tips

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they
are, it may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to
have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service
shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your
vehicle.

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is
designed for off–road use also. In addition, this vehicle
has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than
that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death
or serious injury. Be sure to read “Off–road vehicle precautions” on page 242 in Section 2 and “Off–road driving precautions” on page 263 in Section 3.

v

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

vi

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a
injury to
informed
order to
others.

warning against anything which may cause
people if the warning is ignored. You are
about what you must or must not do in
reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.

NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Important Information About This Manual
ii

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
Repair Manual Information

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,
chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre
vent small problems from growing into larger ones lat
er on. The repair manual outlines exactly what main
tenance is required and clearly explains how to do the
work yourself step−by−step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug re
placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil
and filter replacement.

Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for 4RUNNER, written in
English, may be purchased as applicable from
any Toyota dealer.
Pub. Name: 2003 4RUNNER Repair Manual
Pub. No.: RM1001U1
RM1001U2
RM1034U

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)

’03 4Runner_U (L/O 0305)

Seat Belt Warning
WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU 	 PLEASE BUCKLE UP
Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.
Toyota belts are:


 Comfortable

 Easy to use

 Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

2003 4RUNNER from Apr. ’03 Prod. (OM35820U)



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : wvpress3
Create Date                     : 2013:05:06 19:57:15-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:05:06 19:57:15-04:00
Title                           : 
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2013:05:06 19:57:15-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe Acrobat Pro 11.0.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : wvpress3
Document ID                     : uuid:036a1841-f82c-489d-b58d-80b8def91804
Instance ID                     : uuid:410e95de-47b4-4e32-ba8d-f41cd3ce026a
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat Pro 11.0.2
Page Count                      : 408

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools